{"title":"Beverages","description":"\u003ch2\u003eExplore Our beverage collection\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan data-mce-fragment=\"1\"\u003eOur beverage collection offers a wide variety of drinks to quench your thirst and satisfy your taste buds.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan data-mce-fragment=\"1\"\u003eWhether you're looking for a refreshing glass of water, a cup of hot coffee, or a cold beer, you're sure to find something to your liking.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan data-mce-fragment=\"1\"\u003eThis collection includes everyday options and flavorful picks for different tastes and occasions. It is easy to browse drinks for mornings, meals, or quiet evenings at home.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan data-mce-fragment=\"1\"\u003eBrowse choices that pair well with meals, breaks, or relaxing moments at home. Some shoppers may prefer simple staples, while others may want bold and refreshing flavors.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan data-mce-fragment=\"1\"\u003eYou may also find favorites like lemonade or non alcoholic beer among the selection. These options can suit casual gatherings, quick lunches, or small moments of refreshment.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan data-mce-fragment=\"1\"\u003eOur selection makes it easier to explore drinks that suit your preference. Use this collection to compare familiar picks and discover new options for different moods and routines.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cspan data-mce-fragment=\"1\"\u003eFrom light choices to richer tastes, there is something for many preferences. The range is designed to help you shop with ease and find drinks that fit your day.\u003c\/span\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"polar-seltzer-variety-special-cranberry-lime-mandarin-ruby-red-grapefruit","title":"Polar Seltzer Variety Special","description":"\u003cp\u003ePolar Seltzer Variety Special is an assorted pack of Polar Seltzer 12 fl oz (355 mL) cans in four flavors, Ruby Red Grapefruit, Cranberry Lime, Mandarin, and Lime, with zero calories, zero sweeteners, and zero sodium. It is sold as one variety pack, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePolar Seltzer Variety Pack: Zero-Calorie Sparkling Water in Four Citrus Flavors\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFour flavors in one pack\u003c\/strong\u003e — Ruby Red Grapefruit, Cranberry Lime, Mandarin, and Lime\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZero calories, zero sweeteners, zero sodium\u003c\/strong\u003e — carbonated water and natural flavors only\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo added sugar or artificial ingredients\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean, crisp seltzer without aftertaste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMade in Worcester, Massachusetts\u003c\/strong\u003e — bottled by Polar Beverages, a family company since 1882\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e12 fl oz (355 mL) aluminum cans\u003c\/strong\u003e — fridge-friendly slim cans\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eKosher and gluten-free\u003c\/strong\u003e — suitable for most diets, with nothing to count\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChill the cans and drink them straight, or pour over ice with a wedge of the matching fruit. Cranberry Lime and Ruby Red Grapefruit make good mixers for vodka and gin, and Lime brightens a glass of iced tea. Store unopened cans in a cool, dry place away from sunlight; for the best fizz, refrigerate for at least two hours before opening.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Polar Seltzer\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePolar Beverages has been bottling in Worcester, Massachusetts, since 1882 and is still run by the founding Crowley family, making it the largest independent soft drink bottler in the United States. Polar Seltzer, its flagship, comes in dozens of natural flavors and a rotating seasonal line. Find more drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e, or learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.polarseltzer.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003epolarseltzer.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Polar Seltzer contain allergens, sugar, or sweeteners?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Every Polar Seltzer flavor contains only carbonated water and natural flavors, with zero calories, zero sugar, zero sweeteners, and zero sodium, and the cans are labeled kosher and gluten-free. No major allergens are declared. Anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed label on the can before drinking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Polar Seltzer?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it cold, straight from the can or over ice with a slice of citrus. Keep unopened cans in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, and refrigerate for at least two hours before opening for the sharpest carbonation. Once opened, finish the can the same day, since the bubbles fade within hours.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhich flavors are in the Polar Seltzer Variety Special?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe pack pictured includes four Polar Seltzer flavors: Ruby Red Grapefruit, Cranberry Lime, Mandarin, and Lime. Grapefruit and Cranberry Lime lean tart, Mandarin is the sweetest-tasting despite having no sugar, and Lime is the crispest. The exact mix in a pack may vary with availability, so check the pack label.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Polar Seltzer made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePolar Seltzer is made in Worcester, Massachusetts, by Polar Beverages, a family-owned bottler founded in 1882. The seltzer has been a New England staple for decades and is now sold across the United States. This variety pack lets you try four of the most popular citrus flavors in one order.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Polar Seltzer contain allergens, sugar, or sweeteners?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Every Polar Seltzer flavor contains only carbonated water and natural flavors, with zero calories, zero sugar, zero sweeteners, and zero sodium, and the cans are labeled kosher and gluten-free. No major allergens are declared. Anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed label on the can before drinking.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I serve and store Polar Seltzer?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Serve it cold, straight from the can or over ice with a slice of citrus. Keep unopened cans in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, and refrigerate for at least two hours before opening for the sharpest carbonation. Once opened, finish the can the same day, since the bubbles fade within hours.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Which flavors are in the Polar Seltzer Variety Special?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The pack pictured includes four Polar Seltzer flavors: Ruby Red Grapefruit, Cranberry Lime, Mandarin, and Lime. Grapefruit and Cranberry Lime lean tart, Mandarin is the sweetest-tasting despite having no sugar, and Lime is the crispest. The exact mix in a pack may vary with availability, so check the pack label.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Polar Seltzer made?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Polar Seltzer is made in Worcester, Massachusetts, by Polar Beverages, a family-owned bottler founded in 1882. The seltzer has been a New England staple for decades and is now sold across the United States. This variety pack lets you try four of the most popular citrus flavors in one order.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Polar","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":42627996844223,"sku":"2359_4.00_24.89- LOCAL","price":24.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/products\/81GygmyrEhL.jpg?v=1777318881"},{"product_id":"poland-spring-mini-water-bottles-8-oz","title":"Poland Spring Mini Water Bottles, 8 fl oz – Natural Spring Water","description":"\u003cp\u003ePoland Spring Mini Water Bottles are 8 fl oz (237 mL) bottles of still, 100 percent natural spring water sourced from springs in Maine, sized for lunchboxes, kids' parties, meetings, and small coolers. Choose a single bottle or a Pack of 12, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePoland Spring 8 oz Mini Bottles: Natural Spring Water for Lunches and Parties\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100 percent natural spring water\u003c\/strong\u003e — still, unflavored spring water with naturally occurring electrolytes and one ingredient\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e8 fl oz (237 mL) mini size\u003c\/strong\u003e — half the size of a standard bottle, so kids and guests finish it without waste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZero calories, no sweeteners\u003c\/strong\u003e — plain water with nothing added\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSourced in Maine\u003c\/strong\u003e — Poland Spring draws from a group of springs in Maine and bottles it there\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRecyclable bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — lightweight plastic bottle; cap and label recyclability vary by local program\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single bottle or Pack of 12 for lunch rotation, offices, and events\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChill the bottles and drop one into a lunch bag, cooler, or diaper bag; the 8 oz size also suits meeting tables, waiting rooms, and kids' sports. It is plain still spring water, so it can be used for mixing infant formula or juice concentrate where your pediatrician or the product label allows. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from sunlight, heat, and strong-smelling chemicals, which can affect taste through the plastic. After opening, recap, refrigerate, and finish within a day or two.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Poland Spring\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePoland Spring takes its name from the town of Poland, Maine, where the original spring was first bottled in 1845 and the Poland Spring House resort drew visitors through the 1800s. Today the brand draws from several springs across Maine and is one of the best-selling bottled spring waters in the northeastern United States. It is owned by Primo Brands, the company formed from BlueTriton and Primo Water. Browse more bottled waters and sodas in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.polandspring.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003epolandspring.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Poland Spring mini water contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Poland Spring Natural Spring Water has one ingredient, spring water, with no added flavors, sweeteners, or colors, so it contains none of the major food allergens. It has zero calories and naturally occurring electrolytes only. As with any packaged beverage, read the printed label on the bottle or case for the current water quality and ingredient statement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store and serve Poland Spring 8 oz bottles?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from sunlight, heat, and strong-smelling chemicals such as cleaning products. Serve chilled; it is still water, so it will not fizz. The 8 fl oz (237 mL) size is meant to be finished in one sitting, but if you recap a bottle, refrigerate it and drink it within a day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between the 8 oz mini and the standard 16.9 oz Poland Spring bottle?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe water is identical natural spring water from Maine. The mini holds 8 fl oz (237 mL), less than half the standard 16.9 fl oz bottle, so it fits lunch bags and small hands and avoids half-finished bottles at parties and meetings. The standard bottle is the better choice for a gym bag, a car ride, or all-day hydration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere does Poland Spring water come from?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePoland Spring is sourced from a group of natural springs in Maine and bottled there, making it a US product rather than an import. The brand began at the original spring in Poland, Maine, in 1845. This 8 fl oz mini bottle is the standard US retail size, sold here as a single or in a Pack of 12.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Poland Spring mini water contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Poland Spring Natural Spring Water has one ingredient, spring water, with no added flavors, sweeteners, or colors, so it contains none of the major food allergens. It has zero calories and naturally occurring electrolytes only. As with any packaged beverage, read the printed label on the bottle or case for the current water quality and ingredient statement.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store and serve Poland Spring 8 oz bottles?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from sunlight, heat, and strong-smelling chemicals such as cleaning products. Serve chilled; it is still water, so it will not fizz. The 8 fl oz (237 mL) size is meant to be finished in one sitting, but if you recap a bottle, refrigerate it and drink it within a day.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between the 8 oz mini and the standard 16.9 oz Poland Spring bottle?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The water is identical natural spring water from Maine. The mini holds 8 fl oz (237 mL), less than half the standard 16.9 fl oz bottle, so it fits lunch bags and small hands and avoids half-finished bottles at parties and meetings. The standard bottle is the better choice for a gym bag, a car ride, or all-day hydration.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where does Poland Spring water come from?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Poland Spring is sourced from a group of natural springs in Maine and bottled there, making it a US product rather than an import. The brand began at the original spring in Poland, Maine, in 1845. This 8 fl oz mini bottle is the standard US retail size, sold here as a single or in a Pack of 12.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Poland Spring","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45865679454399,"sku":"POLAND-SPRING-8OZ-1","price":1.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":42576476176575,"sku":"POLAND-SPRING-8OZ-12","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/poland-spring-mini-water-8oz-single.png?v=1784296666"},{"product_id":"nestle-pure-life-purified-water-8oz-pack-of-15","title":"Nestlé Pure Life Purified Water, 8 fl oz Bottles, Pack of 15 (120 fl oz Total)","description":"\u003cp\u003eNestle Pure Life Purified Water 8 fl oz Bottles, Pack of 15, is a case of fifteen 8 fl oz (237 mL) mini bottles, 120 fl oz in total, of purified drinking water with a light blend of minerals added for taste. The small bottle size suits kids' lunchboxes, sports bags, and party coolers, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eNestle Pure Life 8 oz Mini Bottles: Kid-Size Purified Water for Lunchboxes and Events\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePurified water with minerals for taste\u003c\/strong\u003e — water is filtered through a multi-step purification process, then a small amount of minerals is added for a clean, neutral taste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e8 fl oz (237 mL) mini bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — a single-serve size that fits a child's hand and lunchbox and is finished before it goes warm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack of 15 bottles\u003c\/strong\u003e — 120 fl oz per case, enough for a week of school lunches or one party cooler\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRecyclable PET bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — lightweight clear plastic with a twist cap that reseals between sips\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZero calories, no sugar\u003c\/strong\u003e — plain still water with nothing added except trace minerals for taste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBottled in the United States\u003c\/strong\u003e — produced at regional bottling plants for the North American market\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChill the bottles for a few hours before serving; the 8 oz size cools quickly in a cooler with ice. Pack one per lunchbox, hand them out at soccer games and birthday parties, or keep a few in the car for short trips. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong-smelling chemicals such as cleaners or gasoline, and use by the date printed on the cap. Once opened, drink within a day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Nestle Pure Life\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNestle Pure Life launched in 1998 and grew into one of the most widely sold bottled water brands in the world, with a focus on affordable family hydration. In North America the brand is now bottled and distributed under license by BlueTriton Brands, part of Primo Brands, at regional plants across the United States. The Nestle name still appears on the label. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.nestle.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003enestle.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Nestle Pure Life 8 oz water contain any allergens or additives?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Nestle Pure Life is purified water with a small blend of minerals added for taste, typically calcium chloride, sodium bicarbonate, and magnesium sulfate. It contains no sugar, calories, flavoring, or common food allergens. The exact mineral blend is printed on the label of each bottle, so check it if you have a specific concern.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store Nestle Pure Life water bottles?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, ideally below 75 F (24 C), and away from household chemicals, gasoline, or paint, because PET plastic can absorb strong odors. Use by the date printed on the cap. Once a bottle is opened, refrigerate it and finish it within a day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between the 8 oz and 16.9 oz Nestle Pure Life bottles?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBoth hold the same purified water. The 8 fl oz (237 mL) mini bottle is sized for children, small hands, and short outings, and comes 15 to a case. The 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle is the standard adult single-serve size and comes 10 to a case. Choose the mini for lunchboxes and parties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Nestle Pure Life water bottled?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNestle Pure Life sold in the United States is bottled at regional plants across the country, currently operated by BlueTriton Brands, part of Primo Brands, under the Nestle Pure Life name. The source and bottling location for your case are printed on the label. This is a US product, not an import.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Nestle Pure Life 8 oz water contain any allergens or additives?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Nestle Pure Life is purified water with a small blend of minerals added for taste, typically calcium chloride, sodium bicarbonate, and magnesium sulfate. It contains no sugar, calories, flavoring, or common food allergens. The exact mineral blend is printed on the label of each bottle, so check it if you have a specific concern.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store Nestle Pure Life water bottles?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, ideally below 75 F (24 C), and away from household chemicals, gasoline, or paint, because PET plastic can absorb strong odors. Use by the date printed on the cap. Once a bottle is opened, refrigerate it and finish it within a day.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between the 8 oz and 16.9 oz Nestle Pure Life bottles?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Both hold the same purified water. The 8 fl oz (237 mL) mini bottle is sized for children, small hands, and short outings, and comes 15 to a case. The 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle is the standard adult single-serve size and comes 10 to a case. Choose the mini for lunchboxes and parties.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Nestle Pure Life water bottled?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Nestle Pure Life sold in the United States is bottled at regional plants across the country, currently operated by BlueTriton Brands, part of Primo Brands, under the Nestle Pure Life name. The source and bottling location for your case are printed on the label. This is a US product, not an import.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Nestle","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":42422619406527,"sku":"NESTLE-PURELIFE-8OZ-15PK","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/products\/71mmrb4EfIL_fbd85f4c-0e61-46f8-aaf5-e29bf97d89cd.jpg?v=1777319519"},{"product_id":"nestle-water-pure-life-purified-water-16-9-fl-oz-bottle-pack-of-10-total","title":"Nestle Water, Pure Life, Purified Water, 16.9 Fl Oz Bottle (Pack of 10, Total of 169 Fl Oz)","description":"\u003cp\u003eNestle Pure Life Purified Water 16.9 fl oz Bottles, Pack of 10, is a case of ten standard 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottles, 169 fl oz in total, of purified drinking water with a light blend of minerals added for taste. It is the everyday single-serve size for work, school, the gym, and the car, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eNestle Pure Life 16.9 oz Bottles: Everyday Purified Water in a 10-Pack\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePurified water with minerals for taste\u003c\/strong\u003e — water is filtered through a multi-step purification process, then a small amount of minerals is added for a clean, neutral taste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — the standard single-serve size that fits car cup holders, gym bags, and desk drawers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack of 10 bottles\u003c\/strong\u003e — 169 fl oz per case, a convenient count for a small household or office fridge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRecyclable PET bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — lightweight clear plastic with a twist cap that reseals between sips\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZero calories, no sugar\u003c\/strong\u003e — plain still water with nothing added except trace minerals for taste\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBottled in the United States\u003c\/strong\u003e — produced at regional bottling plants for the North American market\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChill a few bottles in the refrigerator and keep the rest of the case in the pantry. Grab one for the commute, the gym, or a desk drawer; the resealable cap makes it easy to sip through the day. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong-smelling chemicals such as cleaners or gasoline, and use by the date printed on the cap. Once opened, drink within a day or refrigerate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Nestle Pure Life\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNestle Pure Life launched in 1998 and grew into one of the most widely sold bottled water brands in the world, with a focus on affordable family hydration. In North America the brand is now bottled and distributed under license by BlueTriton Brands, part of Primo Brands, at regional plants across the United States. The Nestle name still appears on the label. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.nestle.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003enestle.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Nestle Pure Life 16.9 oz water contain any allergens or additives?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Nestle Pure Life is purified water with a small blend of minerals added for taste, typically calcium chloride, sodium bicarbonate, and magnesium sulfate. It contains no sugar, calories, flavoring, or common food allergens. The exact mineral blend is printed on the label of each bottle, so check it if you have a specific concern.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store Nestle Pure Life water bottles?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, ideally below 75 F (24 C), and away from household chemicals, gasoline, or paint, because PET plastic can absorb strong odors. Use by the date printed on the cap. Once a bottle is opened, refrigerate it and finish it within a day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between the 16.9 oz and 8 oz Nestle Pure Life bottles?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBoth hold the same purified water. The 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle is the standard adult single-serve size and comes 10 to a case, 169 fl oz total. The 8 fl oz (237 mL) mini bottle is sized for children and short outings and comes 15 to a case. Choose this size for daily hydration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Nestle Pure Life water bottled?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNestle Pure Life sold in the United States is bottled at regional plants across the country, currently operated by BlueTriton Brands, part of Primo Brands, under the Nestle Pure Life name. The source and bottling location for your case are printed on the label. This is a US product, not an import.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Nestle Pure Life 16.9 oz water contain any allergens or additives?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Nestle Pure Life is purified water with a small blend of minerals added for taste, typically calcium chloride, sodium bicarbonate, and magnesium sulfate. It contains no sugar, calories, flavoring, or common food allergens. The exact mineral blend is printed on the label of each bottle, so check it if you have a specific concern.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store Nestle Pure Life water bottles?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight, ideally below 75 F (24 C), and away from household chemicals, gasoline, or paint, because PET plastic can absorb strong odors. Use by the date printed on the cap. Once a bottle is opened, refrigerate it and finish it within a day.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between the 16.9 oz and 8 oz Nestle Pure Life bottles?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Both hold the same purified water. The 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle is the standard adult single-serve size and comes 10 to a case, 169 fl oz total. The 8 fl oz (237 mL) mini bottle is sized for children and short outings and comes 15 to a case. Choose this size for daily hydration.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Nestle Pure Life water bottled?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Nestle Pure Life sold in the United States is bottled at regional plants across the country, currently operated by BlueTriton Brands, part of Primo Brands, under the Nestle Pure Life name. The source and bottling location for your case are printed on the label. This is a US product, not an import.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Nestle","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":42422619537599,"sku":"1.5_332_20181127","price":24.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/61GauXbtvWL.png?v=1777324214"},{"product_id":"mesh-wild-berry-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artificial-c","title":"Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea | 16 Count | Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea","description":"\u003cp\u003eMesh Wild Berry Stick Tea is a 2.54 oz (72 g) no-mess herbal tea in Mesh's patented stick format — each box holds 16 individually wrapped sticks that brew directly in your cup without a spoon or strainer, available as a Single, Pack of 3, or Pack of 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Wild Berry Stick Tea: Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea in a No-Mess Stick\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16 individually wrapped wild berry herbal tea sticks per box\u003c\/strong\u003e — 2.54 oz (72 g) total, each stick pre-portioned for one cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging\u003c\/strong\u003e — built-in brewing holes let you stir directly in water — no spoon or strainer needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/strong\u003e — per the printed label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWild berry herbal blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts from farms around the world\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact stick format\u003c\/strong\u003e — fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit for brewing away from home\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/strong\u003e — for daily use, gifting, or stocking up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh Wild Berry stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes, adjusting the time to your preferred strength. Remove the stick when done — no strainer or extra tools required. Store unopened sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed tea and coffee should be accessible anywhere, not just at the kitchen table. The brand's patented stick-and-mesh format lets each stick brew directly in a cup without a spoon, bag, or strainer, and Mesh sources its tea and coffee blends from farms across multiple growing regions to keep flavor consistent from box to box. Browse more brew-in-cup options in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/tea\"\u003eTea\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Read more about herbal tisanes on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Herbal_tea\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eWikipedia\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea contain allergens or artificial ingredients?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Wild Berry Stick Tea is made without artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives, and the stick itself is not formulated with common allergens such as milk, soy, or nuts. Facility handling can still vary between runs, so read the printed label on the box for the manufacturer's full ingredient and allergen statement before serving it to anyone with food allergies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew and store Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one stick into a cup of freshly boiled water, stirring gently for 3 to 5 minutes, then lift the stick out — no strainer, spoon, or filter is needed. Store unused sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, and note that the expiration date on the box follows the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea caffeine-free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eAs an herbal blend rather than true tea, Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea is generally caffeine-free, so it can be enjoyed any time of day, including evenings. Read the printed label to confirm, since ingredient sourcing and any blending with true tea leaves can vary between production runs, and Mesh does not publish an exact milligram figure for this flavor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack sizes are available for Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Wild Berry Stick Tea 16-Count comes as a Single box, a Pack of 3, or a Pack of 6. The wild berry flavor pairs well with Mesh's other fruit and herbal sticks if you want to build a variety box. Each box, in every pack size, still holds 16 individually wrapped sticks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea contain allergens or artificial ingredients?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea is made without artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives, and the stick itself is not formulated with common allergens such as milk, soy, or nuts. Facility handling can still vary between runs, so read the printed label on the box for the manufacturer's full ingredient and allergen statement before serving it to anyone with food allergies.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew and store Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Place one stick into a cup of freshly boiled water, stirring gently for 3 to 5 minutes, then lift the stick out — no strainer, spoon, or filter is needed. Store unused sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, and note that the expiration date on the box follows the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea caffeine-free?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"As an herbal blend rather than true tea, Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea is generally caffeine-free, so it can be enjoyed any time of day, including evenings. Read the printed label to confirm, since ingredient sourcing and any blending with true tea leaves can vary between production runs, and Mesh does not publish an exact milligram figure for this flavor.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What pack sizes are available for Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Wild Berry Stick Tea 16-Count comes as a Single box, a Pack of 3, or a Pack of 6. The wild berry flavor pairs well with Mesh's other fruit and herbal sticks if you want to build a variety box. Each box, in every pack size, still holds 16 individually wrapped sticks.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825700593855,"sku":"MESH-WILDBERRY-16CT-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825700626623,"sku":"MESH-WILDBERRY-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825700659391,"sku":"MESH-WILDBERRY-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/71TbS_h6MnL.png?v=1777323698"},{"product_id":"mesh-vanilla-rooibos-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artific-1","title":"Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea | 16 Count | Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea","description":"\u003cp\u003eMesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea is a 2.89 oz (82 g) no-mess, naturally caffeine-free herbal tea in Mesh's patented stick format — each box holds 16 individually wrapped sticks that brew directly in your cup without a spoon or strainer, available as a Single, Pack of 3, or Pack of 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea: Caffeine-Free Rooibos in a No-Mess Stick\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16 individually wrapped vanilla rooibos herbal tea sticks per box\u003c\/strong\u003e — 2.89 oz (82 g) total, each stick pre-portioned for one cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging\u003c\/strong\u003e — built-in brewing holes let you stir directly in water — no spoon or strainer needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/strong\u003e — per the printed label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNaturally caffeine-free rooibos with vanilla\u003c\/strong\u003e — sourced from farms worldwide and curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact stick format\u003c\/strong\u003e — fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit for brewing away from home\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/strong\u003e — for daily use, gifting, or stocking up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh Vanilla Rooibos stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes, adjusting the time to your preferred strength. Remove the stick when done — no strainer or extra tools required. Store unopened sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed tea and coffee should be accessible anywhere, not just at the kitchen table. The brand's patented stick-and-mesh format lets each stick brew directly in a cup without a spoon, bag, or strainer, and Mesh sources its tea and coffee blends from farms across multiple growing regions to keep flavor consistent from box to box. Browse more brew-in-cup options in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/tea\"\u003eTea\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Read more about rooibos on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Rooibos\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eWikipedia\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea contain allergens or artificial ingredients?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea is made without artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives, and the stick itself is not formulated with common allergens such as milk, soy, or nuts. Facility handling can still vary between runs, so read the printed label on the box for the manufacturer's full ingredient and allergen statement before serving it to anyone with food allergies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew and store Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one stick into a cup of freshly boiled water, stirring gently for 3 to 5 minutes, then lift the stick out — no strainer, spoon, or filter is needed. Store unused sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, and note that the expiration date on the box follows the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea caffeine-free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea is made from rooibos, a South African red bush plant that is naturally caffeine-free, so it can be enjoyed any time of day, including right before bed. Read the printed label to confirm, since Mesh occasionally updates blend sourcing between production runs and does not publish an exact milligram figure.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack sizes are available for Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea 16-Count comes as a Single box, a Pack of 3, or a Pack of 6. The vanilla-rooibos flavor makes a milder, evening-friendly alternative to Mesh's true-tea flavors like Green or Earl Grey. Each box, in every pack size, still holds 16 individually wrapped sticks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea contain allergens or artificial ingredients?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea is made without artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives, and the stick itself is not formulated with common allergens such as milk, soy, or nuts. Facility handling can still vary between runs, so read the printed label on the box for the manufacturer's full ingredient and allergen statement before serving it to anyone with food allergies.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew and store Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Place one stick into a cup of freshly boiled water, stirring gently for 3 to 5 minutes, then lift the stick out — no strainer, spoon, or filter is needed. Store unused sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, and note that the expiration date on the box follows the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea caffeine-free?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea is made from rooibos, a South African red bush plant that is naturally caffeine-free, so it can be enjoyed any time of day, including right before bed. Read the printed label to confirm, since Mesh occasionally updates blend sourcing between production runs and does not publish an exact milligram figure.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What pack sizes are available for Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Vanilla Rooibos Stick Tea 16-Count comes as a Single box, a Pack of 3, or a Pack of 6. The vanilla-rooibos flavor makes a milder, evening-friendly alternative to Mesh's true-tea flavors like Green or Earl Grey. Each box, in every pack size, still holds 16 individually wrapped sticks.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825698300095,"sku":"MESH-VANILLAROOIBOS-16CT-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825698332863,"sku":"MESH-VANILLAROOIBOS-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825698365631,"sku":"MESH-VANILLAROOIBOS-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/61Nk_yLZYzS_44d0d1de-562d-4000-bd46-94fe839a7a0f.png?v=1778963442"},{"product_id":"mesh-turkish-apple-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artificia-1","title":"Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea | 16 Count | Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea","description":"\u003cp\u003eMesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea is a 2.4 oz (68 g) no-mess herbal tea in Mesh's patented stick format — each box holds 16 individually wrapped sticks that brew directly in your cup without a spoon or strainer, available as a Single, Pack of 3, or Pack of 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea: Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea in a No-Mess Stick\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16 individually wrapped Turkish apple herbal tea sticks per box\u003c\/strong\u003e — 2.4 oz (68 g) total, each stick pre-portioned for one cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging\u003c\/strong\u003e — built-in brewing holes let you stir directly in water — no spoon or strainer needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/strong\u003e — per the printed label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurkish apple herbal blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — sourced from farms worldwide and curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact stick format\u003c\/strong\u003e — fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit for brewing away from home\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/strong\u003e — for daily use, gifting, or stocking up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh Turkish Apple stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes, adjusting the time to your preferred strength. Remove the stick when done — no strainer or extra tools required. Store unopened sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed tea and coffee should be accessible anywhere, not just at the kitchen table. The brand's patented stick-and-mesh format lets each stick brew directly in a cup without a spoon, bag, or strainer, and Mesh sources its tea and coffee blends from farms across multiple growing regions to keep flavor consistent from box to box. Browse more brew-in-cup options in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/tea\"\u003eTea\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Read more about herbal tisanes on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Herbal_tea\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eWikipedia\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea contain allergens or artificial ingredients?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea is made without artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives, and the stick itself is not formulated with common allergens such as milk, soy, or nuts. Facility handling can still vary between runs, so read the printed label on the box for the manufacturer's full ingredient and allergen statement before serving it to anyone with food allergies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew and store Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one stick into a cup of freshly boiled water, stirring gently for 3 to 5 minutes, then lift the stick out — no strainer, spoon, or filter is needed. Store unused sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, and note that the expiration date on the box follows the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea caffeine-free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eAs an herbal blend rather than true tea, Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea is generally caffeine-free, so it can be enjoyed any time of day, including evenings. Read the printed label to confirm, since ingredient sourcing can vary between production runs, and Mesh does not publish an exact milligram figure for this flavor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack sizes are available for Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea 16-Count comes as a Single box, a Pack of 3, or a Pack of 6. The apple-cinnamon-style Turkish apple flavor is one of Mesh's sweeter herbal sticks, alongside Wild Berry and Pomegranate. Each box, in every pack size, still holds 16 individually wrapped sticks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea contain allergens or artificial ingredients?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea is made without artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives, and the stick itself is not formulated with common allergens such as milk, soy, or nuts. Facility handling can still vary between runs, so read the printed label on the box for the manufacturer's full ingredient and allergen statement before serving it to anyone with food allergies.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew and store Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Place one stick into a cup of freshly boiled water, stirring gently for 3 to 5 minutes, then lift the stick out — no strainer, spoon, or filter is needed. Store unused sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, and note that the expiration date on the box follows the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea caffeine-free?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"As an herbal blend rather than true tea, Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea is generally caffeine-free, so it can be enjoyed any time of day, including evenings. Read the printed label to confirm, since ingredient sourcing can vary between production runs, and Mesh does not publish an exact milligram figure for this flavor.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What pack sizes are available for Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Turkish Apple Stick Tea 16-Count comes as a Single box, a Pack of 3, or a Pack of 6. The apple-cinnamon-style Turkish apple flavor is one of Mesh's sweeter herbal sticks, alongside Wild Berry and Pomegranate. Each box, in every pack size, still holds 16 individually wrapped sticks.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825692958911,"sku":"MESH-TURKISHAPPLE-16CT-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825692991679,"sku":"MESH-TURKISHAPPLE-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825693024447,"sku":"MESH-TURKISHAPPLE-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/51aWVpzqmML_af37ae61-2976-436c-a643-56339d6773e6.png?v=1777324998"},{"product_id":"mesh-thyme-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artificial-colors-1","title":"Mesh Thyme Stick Tea | 16 Count | Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea","description":"\u003cp\u003eMesh Thyme Stick Tea is a 1.87 oz (53 g) no-mess herbal tea in Mesh's patented stick format — each box holds 16 individually wrapped sticks that brew directly in your cup without a spoon or strainer, available as a Single, Pack of 3, or Pack of 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Thyme Stick Tea: Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea in a No-Mess Stick\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16 individually wrapped thyme herbal tea sticks per box\u003c\/strong\u003e — 1.87 oz (53 g) total, each stick pre-portioned for one cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging\u003c\/strong\u003e — built-in brewing holes let you stir directly in water — no spoon or strainer needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/strong\u003e — per the printed label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThyme herbal blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — sourced from farms worldwide and curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact stick format\u003c\/strong\u003e — fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit for brewing away from home\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/strong\u003e — for daily use, gifting, or stocking up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh Thyme stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes, adjusting the time to your preferred strength. Remove the stick when done — no strainer or extra tools required. Store unopened sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed tea and coffee should be accessible anywhere, not just at the kitchen table. The brand's patented stick-and-mesh format lets each stick brew directly in a cup without a spoon, bag, or strainer, and Mesh sources its tea and coffee blends from farms across multiple growing regions to keep flavor consistent from box to box. Browse more brew-in-cup options in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/tea\"\u003eTea\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Read more about herbal tisanes on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Herbal_tea\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eWikipedia\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Thyme Stick Tea contain allergens or artificial ingredients?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Thyme Stick Tea is made without artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives, and the stick itself is not formulated with common allergens such as milk, soy, or nuts. Facility handling can still vary between runs, so read the printed label on the box for the manufacturer's full ingredient and allergen statement before serving it to anyone with food allergies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew and store Mesh Thyme Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one stick into a cup of freshly boiled water, stirring gently for 3 to 5 minutes, then lift the stick out — no strainer, spoon, or filter is needed. Store unused sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, and note that the expiration date on the box follows the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Mesh Thyme Stick Tea caffeine-free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eAs an herbal blend rather than true tea, Mesh Thyme Stick Tea is generally caffeine-free, so it can be enjoyed any time of day, including evenings. Read the printed label to confirm, since ingredient sourcing can vary between production runs, and Mesh does not publish an exact milligram figure for this flavor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack sizes are available for Mesh Thyme Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Thyme Stick Tea 16-Count comes as a Single box, a Pack of 3, or a Pack of 6. The savory thyme profile is a milder, more herbaceous option than Mesh's fruit-forward sticks like Wild Berry or Pomegranate. Each box, in every pack size, still holds 16 individually wrapped sticks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Mesh Thyme Stick Tea contain allergens or artificial ingredients?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Thyme Stick Tea is made without artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives, and the stick itself is not formulated with common allergens such as milk, soy, or nuts. Facility handling can still vary between runs, so read the printed label on the box for the manufacturer's full ingredient and allergen statement before serving it to anyone with food allergies.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew and store Mesh Thyme Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Place one stick into a cup of freshly boiled water, stirring gently for 3 to 5 minutes, then lift the stick out — no strainer, spoon, or filter is needed. Store unused sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, and note that the expiration date on the box follows the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Mesh Thyme Stick Tea caffeine-free?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"As an herbal blend rather than true tea, Mesh Thyme Stick Tea is generally caffeine-free, so it can be enjoyed any time of day, including evenings. Read the printed label to confirm, since ingredient sourcing can vary between production runs, and Mesh does not publish an exact milligram figure for this flavor.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What pack sizes are available for Mesh Thyme Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Thyme Stick Tea 16-Count comes as a Single box, a Pack of 3, or a Pack of 6. The savory thyme profile is a milder, more herbaceous option than Mesh's fruit-forward sticks like Wild Berry or Pomegranate. Each box, in every pack size, still holds 16 individually wrapped sticks.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825682145471,"sku":"MESH-THYME-16CT-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825682178239,"sku":"MESH-THYME-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825682211007,"sku":"MESH-THYME-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/51BMh3BLQhL_0e940a1a-2395-4897-97d5-47c6d3f928db.png?v=1777325195"},{"product_id":"mesh-pomegranate-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artificial-1","title":"Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea | 16 Count | Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea","description":"\u003cp\u003eMesh Pomegranate Stick Tea is a 2.47 oz (70 g) no-mess herbal tea in Mesh's patented stick format — each box holds 16 individually wrapped sticks that brew directly in your cup without a spoon or strainer, available as a Single, Pack of 3, or Pack of 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Pomegranate Stick Tea: Brew-in-Cup Herbal Tea in a No-Mess Stick\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16 individually wrapped pomegranate herbal tea sticks per box\u003c\/strong\u003e — 2.47 oz (70 g) total, each stick pre-portioned for one cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging\u003c\/strong\u003e — built-in brewing holes let you stir directly in water — no spoon or strainer needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/strong\u003e — per the printed label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePomegranate herbal blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — sourced from farms worldwide and curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact stick format\u003c\/strong\u003e — fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit for brewing away from home\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/strong\u003e — for daily use, gifting, or stocking up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh Pomegranate stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes, adjusting the time to your preferred strength. Remove the stick when done — no strainer or extra tools required. Store unopened sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed tea and coffee should be accessible anywhere, not just at the kitchen table. The brand's patented stick-and-mesh format lets each stick brew directly in a cup without a spoon, bag, or strainer, and Mesh sources its tea and coffee blends from farms across multiple growing regions to keep flavor consistent from box to box. Browse more brew-in-cup options in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/tea\"\u003eTea\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Read more about herbal tisanes on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Herbal_tea\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eWikipedia\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea contain allergens or artificial ingredients?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Pomegranate Stick Tea is made without artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives, and the stick itself is not formulated with common allergens such as milk, soy, or nuts. Facility handling can still vary between runs, so read the printed label on the box for the manufacturer's full ingredient and allergen statement before serving it to anyone with food allergies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew and store Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one stick into a cup of freshly boiled water, stirring gently for 3 to 5 minutes, then lift the stick out — no strainer, spoon, or filter is needed. Store unused sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, and note that the expiration date on the box follows the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea caffeine-free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eAs an herbal blend rather than true tea, Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea is generally caffeine-free, so it can be enjoyed any time of day, including evenings. Read the printed label to confirm, since ingredient sourcing can vary between production runs, and Mesh does not publish an exact milligram figure for this flavor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack sizes are available for Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Pomegranate Stick Tea 16-Count comes as a Single box, a Pack of 3, or a Pack of 6. The tart-sweet pomegranate flavor sits alongside Wild Berry and Turkish Apple as one of Mesh's fruit-forward herbal sticks. Each box, in every pack size, still holds 16 individually wrapped sticks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea contain allergens or artificial ingredients?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea is made without artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives, and the stick itself is not formulated with common allergens such as milk, soy, or nuts. Facility handling can still vary between runs, so read the printed label on the box for the manufacturer's full ingredient and allergen statement before serving it to anyone with food allergies.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew and store Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Place one stick into a cup of freshly boiled water, stirring gently for 3 to 5 minutes, then lift the stick out — no strainer, spoon, or filter is needed. Store unused sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, and note that the expiration date on the box follows the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea caffeine-free?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"As an herbal blend rather than true tea, Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea is generally caffeine-free, so it can be enjoyed any time of day, including evenings. Read the printed label to confirm, since ingredient sourcing can vary between production runs, and Mesh does not publish an exact milligram figure for this flavor.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What pack sizes are available for Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Pomegranate Stick Tea 16-Count comes as a Single box, a Pack of 3, or a Pack of 6. The tart-sweet pomegranate flavor sits alongside Wild Berry and Turkish Apple as one of Mesh's fruit-forward herbal sticks. Each box, in every pack size, still holds 16 individually wrapped sticks.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825678901439,"sku":"MESH-POMEGRANATE-16CT-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825678934207,"sku":"MESH-POMEGRANATE-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825678966975,"sku":"MESH-POMEGRANATE-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/51i_W0ZfesL_e2fe28c9-ed66-4961-887e-1de34d54003d.png?v=1777323710"},{"product_id":"mesh-green-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artificial-colors","title":"Mesh Green Stick Tea | 16 Count | Brew-in-Cup Green Tea","description":"\u003cp\u003eMesh Green Stick Tea is a 2.47 oz (70 g) no-mess green tea in Mesh's patented stick format — each box holds 16 individually wrapped sticks that brew directly in your cup without a spoon or strainer, available as a Single, Pack of 3, or Pack of 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Green Stick Tea: Brew-in-Cup Green Tea in a No-Mess Stick\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16 individually wrapped green tea sticks per box\u003c\/strong\u003e — 2.47 oz (70 g) total, each stick pre-portioned for one cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging\u003c\/strong\u003e — built-in brewing holes let you stir directly in water — no spoon or strainer needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/strong\u003e — per the printed label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGreen tea blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — sourced from farms worldwide and curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact stick format\u003c\/strong\u003e — fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit for brewing away from home\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/strong\u003e — for daily use, gifting, or stocking up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh Green Tea stick into a cup of hot water around 175 F (80 C) — avoid fully boiling water so the delicate flavor does not turn bitter — and stir gently for 2 to 4 minutes. Remove the stick when done — no strainer or extra tools required. Store unopened sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed tea and coffee should be accessible anywhere, not just at the kitchen table. The brand's patented stick-and-mesh format lets each stick brew directly in a cup without a spoon, bag, or strainer, and Mesh sources its tea and coffee blends from farms across multiple growing regions to keep flavor consistent from box to box. Browse more brew-in-cup options in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/tea\"\u003eTea\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Read more about green tea on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Green_tea\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eWikipedia\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Green Stick Tea contain allergens or artificial ingredients?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Green Stick Tea is made without artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives, and the stick itself is not formulated with common allergens such as milk, soy, or nuts. Facility handling can still vary between runs, so read the printed label on the box for the manufacturer's full ingredient and allergen statement before serving it to anyone with food allergies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew and store Mesh Green Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one stick into a cup of 175 F (80 C) water, stirring gently for 2 to 4 minutes, then lift the stick out — no strainer, spoon, or filter is needed. Store unused sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, and note that the expiration date on the box follows the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Mesh Green Stick Tea caffeine-free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, in moderation. Unlike Mesh's herbal sticks, Mesh Green Stick Tea is made from true tea leaves and naturally contains caffeine. Read the printed label for the manufacturer's stated caffeine content, since it can vary by harvest and brew strength.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack sizes are available for Mesh Green Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Green Stick Tea 16-Count comes as a Single box, a Pack of 3, or a Pack of 6. Unlike Mesh's caffeine-free herbal sticks, Green Tea and Earl Grey are true teas with a naturally lighter, grassier profile. Each box, in every pack size, still holds 16 individually wrapped sticks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Mesh Green Stick Tea contain allergens or artificial ingredients?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Green Stick Tea is made without artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives, and the stick itself is not formulated with common allergens such as milk, soy, or nuts. Facility handling can still vary between runs, so read the printed label on the box for the manufacturer's full ingredient and allergen statement before serving it to anyone with food allergies.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew and store Mesh Green Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Place one stick into a cup of 175 F (80 C) water, stirring gently for 2 to 4 minutes, then lift the stick out — no strainer, spoon, or filter is needed. Store unused sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, and note that the expiration date on the box follows the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Mesh Green Stick Tea caffeine-free?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes, in moderation. Unlike Mesh's herbal sticks, Mesh Green Stick Tea is made from true tea leaves and naturally contains caffeine. Read the printed label for the manufacturer's stated caffeine content, since it can vary by harvest and brew strength.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What pack sizes are available for Mesh Green Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Green Stick Tea 16-Count comes as a Single box, a Pack of 3, or a Pack of 6. Unlike Mesh's caffeine-free herbal sticks, Green Tea and Earl Grey are true teas with a naturally lighter, grassier profile. Each box, in every pack size, still holds 16 individually wrapped sticks.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825667629247,"sku":"MESH-GREENTEA-16CT-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825667662015,"sku":"MESH-GREENTEA-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825667694783,"sku":"MESH-GREENTEA-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/518YPsCClzL.png?v=1777325144"},{"product_id":"mesh-earl-grey-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artificial-co-1","title":"Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea | 16 Count | Brew-in-Cup Earl Grey","description":"\u003cp\u003eMesh Earl Grey Stick Tea is a 2.54 oz (72 g) no-mess Earl Grey tea in Mesh's patented stick format — each box holds 16 individually wrapped sticks that brew directly in your cup without a spoon or strainer, available as a Single, Pack of 3, or Pack of 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Earl Grey Stick Tea: Bergamot Black Tea in a No-Mess Stick\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16 individually wrapped Earl Grey tea sticks per box\u003c\/strong\u003e — 2.54 oz (72 g) total, each stick pre-portioned for one cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging\u003c\/strong\u003e — built-in brewing holes let you stir directly in water — no spoon or strainer needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/strong\u003e — per the printed label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEarl Grey blend with natural bergamot\u003c\/strong\u003e — sourced from farms worldwide and curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact stick format\u003c\/strong\u003e — fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit for brewing away from home\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/strong\u003e — for daily use, gifting, or stocking up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh Earl Grey stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes, adjusting the time to your preferred strength. Remove the stick when done — no strainer or extra tools required. Store unopened sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed tea and coffee should be accessible anywhere, not just at the kitchen table. The brand's patented stick-and-mesh format lets each stick brew directly in a cup without a spoon, bag, or strainer, and Mesh sources its tea and coffee blends from farms across multiple growing regions to keep flavor consistent from box to box. Browse more brew-in-cup options in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/tea\"\u003eTea\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Read more about Earl Grey tea on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Earl_Grey_tea\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eWikipedia\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea contain allergens or artificial ingredients?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Earl Grey Stick Tea is made without artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives, and the stick itself is not formulated with common allergens such as milk, soy, or nuts. Facility handling can still vary between runs, so read the printed label on the box for the manufacturer's full ingredient and allergen statement before serving it to anyone with food allergies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew and store Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one stick into a cup of freshly boiled water, stirring gently for 3 to 5 minutes, then lift the stick out — no strainer, spoon, or filter is needed. Store unused sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, and note that the expiration date on the box follows the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea caffeine-free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, in moderation. Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea is a black tea blend with natural bergamot, so unlike Mesh's herbal sticks it naturally contains caffeine. Read the printed label for the manufacturer's stated caffeine content, since it can vary by harvest and brew strength.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack sizes are available for Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Earl Grey Stick Tea 16-Count comes as a Single box, a Pack of 3, or a Pack of 6. Earl Grey is Mesh's citrus-forward black tea option, distinct from the caffeine-free herbal and rooibos sticks in the lineup. Each box, in every pack size, still holds 16 individually wrapped sticks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea contain allergens or artificial ingredients?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea is made without artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives, and the stick itself is not formulated with common allergens such as milk, soy, or nuts. Facility handling can still vary between runs, so read the printed label on the box for the manufacturer's full ingredient and allergen statement before serving it to anyone with food allergies.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew and store Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Place one stick into a cup of freshly boiled water, stirring gently for 3 to 5 minutes, then lift the stick out — no strainer, spoon, or filter is needed. Store unused sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, and note that the expiration date on the box follows the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea caffeine-free?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes, in moderation. Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea is a black tea blend with natural bergamot, so unlike Mesh's herbal sticks it naturally contains caffeine. Read the printed label for the manufacturer's stated caffeine content, since it can vary by harvest and brew strength.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What pack sizes are available for Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Earl Grey Stick Tea 16-Count comes as a Single box, a Pack of 3, or a Pack of 6. Earl Grey is Mesh's citrus-forward black tea option, distinct from the caffeine-free herbal and rooibos sticks in the lineup. Each box, in every pack size, still holds 16 individually wrapped sticks.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825665663167,"sku":"MESH-EARLGREY-16CT-SINGLE-1","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825665695935,"sku":"MESH-EARLGREY-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825665728703,"sku":"MESH-EARLGREY-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/51D96DiYP3L_ada18e22-4a07-43eb-8685-8f8899ad92e4.png?v=1777324411"},{"product_id":"mesh-cold-coffee-16-sticks-coffee-enjoyment-made-easy-no-bag-no-drips-no-s","title":"Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks | 16 Count | Brew-in-Cup Cold Coffee","description":"\u003cp\u003eMesh Cold Coffee Sticks are a 2.82 oz (80 g) no-mess cold coffee in Mesh's patented stick format — each box holds 16 individually wrapped sticks that stir directly into cold or iced water without a bag, filter, or extra equipment, available as a Single, Pack of 3, or Pack of 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Cold Coffee Sticks: Brew-in-Cup Cold Coffee in a No-Mess Stick\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16 individually wrapped cold coffee sticks per box\u003c\/strong\u003e — 2.82 oz (80 g) total, each stick pre-portioned for one glass\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePatented stick-shaped mesh packaging\u003c\/strong\u003e — built-in brewing holes let you stir directly into cold or iced water — no bag or filter needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/strong\u003e — per the printed label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCoffee blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — sourced from farms worldwide and curated by Mesh's in-house coffee experts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact stick format\u003c\/strong\u003e — fits easily in a bag, desk drawer, or travel kit for cold brew on the go\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAvailable in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/strong\u003e — for daily use, gifting, or stocking up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one Mesh Cold Coffee stick into a glass of cold or iced water and stir gently for 2 to 3 minutes, adjusting the time to your preferred strength. Remove the stick when done — no filter or extra tools required. Store unopened sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea was founded on the idea that brewed tea and coffee should be accessible anywhere, not just at the kitchen table. The brand's patented stick-and-mesh format lets each stick brew directly in a cup without a spoon, bag, or strainer, and Mesh sources its tea and coffee blends from farms across multiple growing regions to keep flavor consistent from box to box. Browse more brew-in-cup options in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Read more about instant coffee on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Instant_coffee\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eWikipedia\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks contain allergens or artificial ingredients?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Cold Coffee Sticks are made without artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives, and the stick itself is not formulated with common allergens such as milk, soy, or nuts. Facility handling can still vary between production runs, so read the printed label on the box for the manufacturer's full ingredient and allergen statement before serving it to anyone with food allergies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew and store Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one stick into a glass of cold or iced water, stir gently for 2 to 3 minutes, then lift the stick out — no filter, bag, or extra tools are needed. Store unused sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, and note that the expiration date on the box follows the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks contain caffeine?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. As a coffee product rather than an herbal tisane, Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks naturally contain caffeine, similar to a cup of regular brewed coffee. Read the printed label for the manufacturer's stated caffeine content per stick, since it can vary by roast and blend, and choose one of Mesh's caffeine-free herbal sticks instead if you are avoiding caffeine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat pack sizes are available for Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Cold Coffee Sticks 16-Count come as a Single box, a Pack of 3, or a Pack of 6. Unlike Mesh's tea sticks, this flavor is made for cold or iced water rather than hot water. Each box, in every pack size, still holds 16 individually wrapped sticks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks contain allergens or artificial ingredients?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks are made without artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives, and the stick itself is not formulated with common allergens such as milk, soy, or nuts. Facility handling can still vary between production runs, so read the printed label on the box for the manufacturer's full ingredient and allergen statement before serving it to anyone with food allergies.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew and store Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Place one stick into a glass of cold or iced water, stir gently for 2 to 3 minutes, then lift the stick out — no filter, bag, or extra tools are needed. Store unused sticks in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, and note that the expiration date on the box follows the DD\/MM\/YYYY format.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks contain caffeine?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. As a coffee product rather than an herbal tisane, Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks naturally contain caffeine, similar to a cup of regular brewed coffee. Read the printed label for the manufacturer's stated caffeine content per stick, since it can vary by roast and blend, and choose one of Mesh's caffeine-free herbal sticks instead if you are avoiding caffeine.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What pack sizes are available for Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Cold Coffee Sticks 16-Count come as a Single box, a Pack of 3, or a Pack of 6. Unlike Mesh's tea sticks, this flavor is made for cold or iced water rather than hot water. Each box, in every pack size, still holds 16 individually wrapped sticks.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825651835071,"sku":"MESH-COLDCOFFEE-16CT-SINGLE-1","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825651867839,"sku":"MESH-COLDCOFFEE-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825651900607,"sku":"MESH-COLDCOFFEE-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/products\/61uJ2g5emWS.jpg?v=1777319913"},{"product_id":"mesh-black-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artificial-colors","title":"Mesh Black Stick Tea | 16 Sticks | Brew-in-Cup Black Tea","description":"\u003cp\u003eMesh Black Stick Tea is a 2.4 oz (68 g) box of 16 individually wrapped black tea sticks that brew directly in the cup, no spoon or strainer needed. Each stick is a single-serve mesh tube you stir into hot water like a spoon, and the box is available as a Single, Pack of 3, or Pack of 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Black Stick Tea 16-Count: Brew-in-Cup Black Tea Without a Strainer\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16 individually wrapped sticks\u003c\/strong\u003e — one box holds 16 single-serve black tea sticks, 2.4 oz (68 g) total\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePatented mesh-stick design\u003c\/strong\u003e — built-in brewing holes let the stick double as a stirrer, right in the cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo spoon or strainer needed\u003c\/strong\u003e — the mesh shell keeps tea leaves contained from the first stir to the last sip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo artificial colors, flavors, or preservatives\u003c\/strong\u003e — just black tea leaves inside the stick\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSourced from farms worldwide\u003c\/strong\u003e — the black tea blend is curated by Mesh's in-house tea experts for a consistent cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for stocking a desk drawer, kitchen, or travel bag\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDrop one stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes, adjusting the time to taste. Lift the stick out when you're done; no spoon or strainer is required. Store the box in a cool, dry place away from sunlight and strong odors, and note that the printed expiration date follows a DD\/MM\/YYYY format rather than the US MM\/DD\/YYYY convention.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh Stick Tea\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh Stick Tea built its patented stick-and-mesh format around the idea that a properly brewed cup shouldn't require a kettle full of extra tools. Each stick is designed to stir directly into hot water, with the mesh shell holding the leaves in place throughout brewing. The brand sources its tea from farms across multiple growing regions and blends them for a consistent flavor from box to box. Explore more in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/tea\"\u003eTea\u003c\/a\u003e collection, or read more about black tea on \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/en.wikipedia.org\/wiki\/Tea\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eWikipedia\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Black Stick Tea contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Black Stick Tea is made from black tea leaves only, so it does not contain the common allergens found in dairy, nut, or gluten products. It is processed in a facility that may also handle other items, so anyone with a severe allergy should read the printed packaging before brewing, since facility notices can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Mesh Black Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes, adjusting the time to your preferred strength. The mesh brewing holes let the water infuse the tea while you stir, so there is no separate spoon, bag, or strainer to deal with, and cleanup is just removing and discarding the stick.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat makes Mesh Black Stick Tea different from a regular tea bag?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eA standard tea bag needs a spoon to stir and a saucer to rest on while it steeps. A Mesh stick is stirred directly in the cup like a utensil, and its mesh shell keeps the leaves fully contained, so there are no drips, no soggy bag to discard separately, and no loose leaves left behind in the cup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Black Stick Tea contain caffeine?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBlack tea naturally contains caffeine, and the exact amount can vary by batch and brew time. For a precise figure, read the printed packaging, since Mesh does not publish a single caffeine number that applies to every stick in every box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Mesh Black Stick Tea contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Black Stick Tea is made from black tea leaves only, so it does not contain the common allergens found in dairy, nut, or gluten products. It is processed in a facility that may also handle other items, so anyone with a severe allergy should read the printed packaging before brewing, since facility notices can change between production runs.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew Mesh Black Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Place one stick into a cup of freshly boiled water and stir gently for 3 to 5 minutes, adjusting the time to your preferred strength. The mesh brewing holes let the water infuse the tea while you stir, so there is no separate spoon, bag, or strainer to deal with, and cleanup is just removing and discarding the stick.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What makes Mesh Black Stick Tea different from a regular tea bag?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"A standard tea bag needs a spoon to stir and a saucer to rest on while it steeps. A Mesh stick is stirred directly in the cup like a utensil, and its mesh shell keeps the leaves fully contained, so there are no drips, no soggy bag to discard separately, and no loose leaves left behind in the cup.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Mesh Black Stick Tea contain caffeine?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Black tea naturally contains caffeine, and the exact amount can vary by batch and brew time. For a precise figure, read the printed packaging, since Mesh does not publish a single caffeine number that applies to every stick in every box.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":42429185982655,"sku":"MESH-BLACKSTICKTEA-16CT-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825644822719,"sku":"MESH-BLACKSTICKTEA-16CT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825644855487,"sku":"MESH-BLACKSTICKTEA-16CT-PACK6","price":36.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/51lh_bxPIsL.png?v=1777323835"},{"product_id":"almdudler-original-austrian-herbal-soda-330ml-can","title":"Almdudler Original Austrian Herbal Soda, 11.2 fl oz Can (330ml)","description":"\u003cp\u003eAlmdudler Original Austrian Herbal Soda is an 11.2 fl oz (330 mL) slim can of lightly carbonated soft drink flavored with a blend of natural Alpine herbs, made in Austria since 1957 with no artificial flavors or colors. It is the genuine imported can, available as a single or in packs of 3, 6, and 12, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAlmdudler Original: Lightly Carbonated Austrian Alpine Herb Soda\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNatural Alpine herb flavor\u003c\/strong\u003e — made with Almdudler's own blend of Alpine herbs, a mildly sweet, herbal taste unlike cola or lemon-lime soda\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo artificial flavors or colors\u003c\/strong\u003e — flavored and colored naturally, as stated on the can\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLightly carbonated\u003c\/strong\u003e — a gentle sparkle that keeps the herbal flavor forward\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAustrian original since 1957\u003c\/strong\u003e — created in Vienna and known as Austria's national soft drink\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e11.2 fl oz (330 mL) slim can\u003c\/strong\u003e — the standard European can format, easy to chill and carry\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6, and Pack of 12 for the fridge, picnics, and parties\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe Almdudler well chilled, straight from the can or poured over ice in a tall glass. For the classic Austrian Almdudler Spritzer, mix it half and half with a dry white wine; for a lighter drink, top it with sparkling water. It also works as a mixer with gin or vodka. Store unopened cans at room temperature away from direct sunlight, and refrigerate any leftover soda in a sealed container and drink it within a day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Almdudler\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlmdudler was created in Vienna in 1957 by Erwin Klein, inspired by the herbal lemonades traditionally drunk in the Austrian Alps. The name combines Alm, an Alpine meadow, with dudeln, to yodel, and the can still shows the brand's traditional dirndl-and-lederhosen couple. The company remains Austrian-owned and exports the drink to many countries, though it is rarely stocked in US grocery stores. Browse more imported sodas in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.almdudler.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ealmdudler.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Almdudler Original contain allergens or caffeine?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eAlmdudler Original is a caffeine-free herbal soft drink, sweetened with sugar and flavored with natural Alpine herb extracts, with no artificial flavors or colors listed on the can. The brand does not declare common allergens such as milk, gluten, or nuts for this drink, but the ingredient list is printed on the can, so read it before drinking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Almdudler?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it cold, ideally straight from the refrigerator, either from the can or over ice in a glass. Austrians also mix it half and half with dry white wine for an Almdudler Spritzer, or dilute it with sparkling water. Keep unopened cans at room temperature away from sunlight; refrigerate opened soda and finish it within a day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Almdudler taste like?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eAlmdudler Original is mildly sweet with a distinct herbal note from its Alpine herb blend and a light carbonation. It is often described as sitting between a ginger ale and an elderflower or herbal lemonade, less sharp than lemon-lime soda and not at all cola-like. First-time drinkers usually find it refreshing and slightly floral rather than medicinal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Almdudler imported from Austria?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. This is the authentic Almdudler Original in the European 11.2 fl oz (330 mL) slim can, the same product sold in Austrian supermarkets, not a version reformulated for another market. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so customers in the United States and Canada receive the original Austrian recipe.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Almdudler Original contain allergens or caffeine?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Almdudler Original is a caffeine-free herbal soft drink, sweetened with sugar and flavored with natural Alpine herb extracts, with no artificial flavors or colors listed on the can. The brand does not declare common allergens such as milk, gluten, or nuts for this drink, but the ingredient list is printed on the can, so read it before drinking.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I serve and store Almdudler?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Serve it cold, ideally straight from the refrigerator, either from the can or over ice in a glass. Austrians also mix it half and half with dry white wine for an Almdudler Spritzer, or dilute it with sparkling water. Keep unopened cans at room temperature away from sunlight; refrigerate opened soda and finish it within a day.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does Almdudler taste like?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Almdudler Original is mildly sweet with a distinct herbal note from its Alpine herb blend and a light carbonation. It is often described as sitting between a ginger ale and an elderflower or herbal lemonade, less sharp than lemon-lime soda and not at all cola-like. First-time drinkers usually find it refreshing and slightly floral rather than medicinal.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Almdudler imported from Austria?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. This is the authentic Almdudler Original in the European 11.2 fl oz (330 mL) slim can, the same product sold in Austrian supermarkets, not a version reformulated for another market. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so customers in the United States and Canada receive the original Austrian recipe.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Almdudler","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45621369077951,"sku":"ALMDUDLER-ORIG-330ML-SINGLE","price":4.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45621369110719,"sku":"ALMDUDLER-ORIG-330ML-PACK3","price":13.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45621369143487,"sku":"ALMDUDLER-ORIG-330ML-PACK6","price":27.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":45906778226879,"sku":"ALMDUDLER-ORIG-330ML-PACK12","price":53.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/image_c214fb9f-d172-4a3a-a3bc-fa005a83e893.png?v=1778970577"},{"product_id":"mesh-peppermint-stick-tea-16-sticks-premium-instant-tea-no-artificial-c-1","title":"Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea | 16 Sticks | Premium Instant Tea","description":"\u003cp\u003eMesh Peppermint Stick Tea is a box of 16 single-serve brew-in-cup sticks, each holding real peppermint leaf inside a perforated stick that steeps directly in hot water with no teabag, strainer, or spoon. It is available as a single box (16 sticks), a Pack of 3 (48 sticks), or a Pack of 6 (96 sticks), shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMesh Peppermint Stick Tea: Single-Serve Peppermint Sticks That Steep in the Cup\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrew-in-cup stick format\u003c\/strong\u003e — a perforated stick holds the peppermint inside; drop it in hot water, stir, and lift it out with no drips\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReal peppermint\u003c\/strong\u003e — clean, cooling peppermint flavor with no artificial colors or flavors, per the box\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16 sticks per box\u003c\/strong\u003e — individually wrapped sticks stay fresh and travel well in a bag, desk drawer, or glove box\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo equipment needed\u003c\/strong\u003e — no teapot, infuser, or strainer; the stick works as its own stirrer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffeine-free herbal infusion\u003c\/strong\u003e — peppermint leaf is naturally caffeine-free, so it suits evenings; confirm on the printed label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single box (16 sticks), Pack of 3 (48 sticks), or Pack of 6 (96 sticks)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one stick in a cup, pour in about 8 fl oz (240 mL) of hot water just off the boil, and stir gently for a few seconds. Let it steep three to five minutes, stirring once or twice, then lift the stick out and discard it. Add honey or a slice of lemon if you like; it also works chilled over ice as a summer peppermint tea. Store the box in a cool, dry cupboard away from strong odors, and keep unused sticks in their wrappers until you brew.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mesh\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMesh is a specialty tea brand built around its patented stick format, a single-serve perforated stick that replaces the teabag and infuser. The company produces black, green, fruit, and herbal varieties, and peppermint is one of its most popular herbal sticks. Mesh sticks are sold in cafes, hotels, and grocery stores in Europe, the Middle East, and North America. Browse more loose-leaf and bagged teas in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/tea\"\u003eTea collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.meshtea.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003emeshtea.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMesh Peppermint Stick Tea is a herbal infusion made from peppermint leaf and does not list milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or other major allergens among its ingredients. The stick itself is food-grade and inert. Because packaging and facility notices can change between production runs, anyone with a food allergy should read the printed ingredient panel on the box before brewing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I use Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eDrop one stick into a cup, add about 8 fl oz (240 mL) of hot water, and stir for a few seconds. Steep three to five minutes, stirring once more, then lift the stick out and discard it. No teabag or strainer is needed. Store the box in a cool, dry cupboard and keep unused sticks wrapped until you brew.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Mesh Stick Tea and a regular teabag?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eA Mesh stick is a rigid perforated tube that holds the leaf, so it doubles as a stirrer and lifts out cleanly without dripping or squeezing. Teabags float, need a spoon, and often leave a soggy bag to deal with. The stick format also gives the water more contact with the leaf, so peppermint flavor comes through quickly and clearly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat sizes and pack options are available for Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eEach box of Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea holds 16 individually wrapped sticks. You can order a single box for 16 sticks, a Pack of 3 for 48 sticks, or a Pack of 6 for 96 sticks. Multi-packs are the practical choice for offices, waiting rooms, or households that drink peppermint tea every day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea is a herbal infusion made from peppermint leaf and does not list milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or other major allergens among its ingredients. The stick itself is food-grade and inert. Because packaging and facility notices can change between production runs, anyone with a food allergy should read the printed ingredient panel on the box before brewing.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I use Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Drop one stick into a cup, add about 8 fl oz (240 mL) of hot water, and stir for a few seconds. Steep three to five minutes, stirring once more, then lift the stick out and discard it. No teabag or strainer is needed. Store the box in a cool, dry cupboard and keep unused sticks wrapped until you brew.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Mesh Stick Tea and a regular teabag?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"A Mesh stick is a rigid perforated tube that holds the leaf, so it doubles as a stirrer and lifts out cleanly without dripping or squeezing. Teabags float, need a spoon, and often leave a soggy bag to deal with. The stick format also gives the water more contact with the leaf, so peppermint flavor comes through quickly and clearly.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What sizes and pack options are available for Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Each box of Mesh Peppermint Stick Tea holds 16 individually wrapped sticks. You can order a single box for 16 sticks, a Pack of 3 for 48 sticks, or a Pack of 6 for 96 sticks. Multi-packs are the practical choice for offices, waiting rooms, or households that drink peppermint tea every day.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Mesh Stick Tea","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45825622671551,"sku":"MESH-PEPPERMINT-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45825622704319,"sku":"MESH-PEPPERMINT-PACK3","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45825622737087,"sku":"MESH-PEPPERMINT-PACK6","price":35.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/513bYM6p0pL_3082eb9c-945f-492b-a0ce-e138b5a77e32.png?v=1778963489"},{"product_id":"lorina-sparkling-lemonade-prestige-750ml-gluten-free-since-1895","title":"Lorina Sparkling Lemonade Naturally Flavored Sparkling Soda, 25.4 fl oz (750mL), Prestige Collection, Gluten-Free, Since 1895","description":"\u003cp\u003eLorina Sparkling Lemonade is a 25.4 fl oz (750 mL) swing-top glass bottle of naturally flavored French sparkling lemonade from the Prestige Collection, made in France by a lemonade house founded in 1895, gluten-free and free of artificial colors and flavors. It is the genuine imported bottle, available as a single or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eLorina Sparkling Lemonade 750 mL: French Swing-Top Lemonade Since 1895\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNaturally flavored lemon\u003c\/strong\u003e — bright, crisp lemon with fine carbonation and no artificial colors or flavors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePrestige Collection\u003c\/strong\u003e — Lorina's premium line, the one served in French cafes and sold at delis and specialty grocers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSwing-top glass bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — the reusable flip-top glass bottle with a rubber gasket that reseals to hold the fizz\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGluten-free\u003c\/strong\u003e — labeled gluten-free, per the bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e25.4 fl oz (750 mL)\u003c\/strong\u003e — the table size, enough for four to six glasses at dinner or brunch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for dinner parties, gifts, and stocking up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChill the bottle well, flip the swing-top open, and pour over ice with a slice of lemon or a sprig of mint; it also works as a mixer with gin, vodka, or sparkling wine for a French 75-style cocktail. Reseal the swing-top between pours to keep the carbonation. Store unopened bottles upright in a cool, dark place away from sunlight and heat. After opening, refrigerate with the top clamped shut and finish within two to three days. The empty bottle can be washed and reused for water, homemade lemonade, or infused oils.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Lorina\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLorina was founded in 1895 by Victor Geyer in Munster, in the Alsace region of France, and became known across the country for its artisan lemonades in the traditional swing-top bottle. The company still produces its sodas in France and exports them widely, with the Prestige Collection covering flavors from classic lemon to blood orange and pink lemonade. The glass bottle with its wire-bail closure has become the brand's signature. Browse more imported sodas and drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.lorina.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003elorina.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Lorina Sparkling Lemonade contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eLorina Sparkling Lemonade is a naturally flavored carbonated soft drink, labeled gluten-free and free of artificial colors and flavors, and its ingredients do not include milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or egg. Because European recipes and facility notices can change between production runs, anyone with a food allergy should read the printed ingredient panel on the bottle before drinking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Lorina Sparkling Lemonade?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it well chilled over ice with a slice of lemon, or use it as a mixer for cocktails and spritzes. Store unopened bottles upright in a cool, dark place away from sunlight and heat. After opening, clamp the swing-top shut, refrigerate, and finish within two to three days while the fizz lasts. The bottle can be washed and reused.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Lorina Sparkling Lemonade and American lemonade?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eLorina is a French limonade, a clear carbonated soft drink with a light, crisp lemon flavor and fine bubbles, closer to a premium lemon soda than to the cloudy, still, fresh-squeezed lemonade common in the United States. It is naturally flavored with no artificial colors, and the 25.4 fl oz (750 mL) swing-top bottle is meant for the table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Lorina Sparkling Lemonade imported from Europe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Lorina is made in France by the lemonade house founded in 1895 and this is the original 750 mL swing-top glass bottle from the Prestige Collection, not a US-made version. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same lemonade sold in French cafes and grocers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Lorina Sparkling Lemonade contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Lorina Sparkling Lemonade is a naturally flavored carbonated soft drink, labeled gluten-free and free of artificial colors and flavors, and its ingredients do not include milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or egg. Because European recipes and facility notices can change between production runs, anyone with a food allergy should read the printed ingredient panel on the bottle before drinking.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I serve and store Lorina Sparkling Lemonade?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Serve it well chilled over ice with a slice of lemon, or use it as a mixer for cocktails and spritzes. Store unopened bottles upright in a cool, dark place away from sunlight and heat. After opening, clamp the swing-top shut, refrigerate, and finish within two to three days while the fizz lasts. The bottle can be washed and reused.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Lorina Sparkling Lemonade and American lemonade?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Lorina is a French limonade, a clear carbonated soft drink with a light, crisp lemon flavor and fine bubbles, closer to a premium lemon soda than to the cloudy, still, fresh-squeezed lemonade common in the United States. It is naturally flavored with no artificial colors, and the 25.4 fl oz (750 mL) swing-top bottle is meant for the table.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Lorina Sparkling Lemonade imported from Europe?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. Lorina is made in France by the lemonade house founded in 1895 and this is the original 750 mL swing-top glass bottle from the Prestige Collection, not a US-made version. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same lemonade sold in French cafes and grocers.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Lorina","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45646393540799,"sku":"LORINA-LEMONADE750-SINGLE-1","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45646393573567,"sku":"LORINA-LEMONADE750-PACK3","price":19.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45670664503487,"sku":"LORINA-SPARKLING-LEMONADE-254FLOZ-PACK6","price":37.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/lorlem1.webp?v=1779549133"},{"product_id":"muhlhauser-waldmeister-syrup-650ml","title":"Mühlhäuser Waldmeister Syrup 500ml — German Woodruff Syrup","description":"\u003cp\u003eMühlhäuser Waldmeister Syrup is a 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) glass bottle of concentrated German woodruff syrup, the sweet, herbal, bright green flavor behind classic Waldmeister soda and Maibowle. It is the genuine imported product, available as a single or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMühlhäuser Waldmeister Syrup: Concentrated German Woodruff Flavor for Drinks and Desserts\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAuthentic Waldmeister flavor\u003c\/strong\u003e — the sweet, vanilla-like, slightly herbal taste of woodruff that Germans know from Waldmeister Brause and May punch\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eConcentrated syrup\u003c\/strong\u003e — mix roughly 1 part syrup with 5 to 7 parts water, so one bottle makes well over 20 drinks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16.9 fl oz (500 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — a family-size format for home bars, parties, and cafes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVivid green color\u003c\/strong\u003e — gives spritzers, slushies, and jellies the signature Waldmeister look without extra coloring\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVersatile in the kitchen\u003c\/strong\u003e — flavors sparkling water, lemonade, cocktails, ice cream, yogurt, panna cotta, and cakes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eImported from Germany\u003c\/strong\u003e — made by Mühlhäuser, a German syrup producer, in the original European recipe\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor a classic Waldmeister Schorle, pour about 1 fl oz (30 mL) of syrup into a glass and top with 5 to 7 fl oz of cold sparkling water; adjust to taste. For Maibowle, stir a splash into chilled white wine and sparkling water with a few strawberries. Blend syrup with crushed ice for a green slushie, or drizzle over vanilla ice cream and yogurt. Store the bottle in a cool, dry place away from sunlight, close tightly after use, and refrigerate once opened.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mühlhäuser\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMühlhäuser is a German producer of fruit and flavor syrups, best known for traditional varieties such as Waldmeister that are hard to find outside Europe. Waldmeister, or sweet woodruff, is a woodland herb that has flavored German drinks and desserts for centuries, most famously in Maibowle served each spring. The syrup format makes that flavor easy to use year-round. Browse more imported drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e or explore our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e range. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.muehlhaeuser.de\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003emuehlhaeuser.de\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mühlhäuser Waldmeister Syrup contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eWaldmeister syrup is a sugar-based flavored syrup and does not typically contain milk, nuts, eggs, or gluten ingredients. Because this is an imported German product and recipes can change between production runs, anyone with a food allergy should read the printed ingredient panel on the bottle before use rather than relying on this description.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I use Waldmeister syrup and how should I store it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMix about 1 part syrup with 5 to 7 parts cold sparkling or still water for a Waldmeister spritzer, or add a splash to white wine, prosecco, lemonade, or gin and tonic. Blend with ice for slushies or drizzle over ice cream. Keep the bottle cool and out of sunlight, close it tightly after each use, and refrigerate after opening.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Waldmeister (woodruff) syrup taste like?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eWaldmeister has a sweet, gently herbal flavor often described as a mix of vanilla, fresh hay, and green herbs with a light floral finish. It is the taste of German Waldmeister soda, green jelly, and Maibowle, the traditional May wine punch. The syrup is bright green and turns any drink the same color.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Mühlhäuser Waldmeister Syrup imported from Germany?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. This is the genuine Mühlhäuser syrup made in Germany, sold there for Waldmeister Schorle, Brause, and Maibowle. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so customers in the United States and Canada receive the same 500 mL bottle sold in German supermarkets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Mühlhäuser Waldmeister Syrup contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Waldmeister syrup is a sugar-based flavored syrup and does not typically contain milk, nuts, eggs, or gluten ingredients. Because this is an imported German product and recipes can change between production runs, anyone with a food allergy should read the printed ingredient panel on the bottle before use rather than relying on this description.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I use Waldmeister syrup and how should I store it?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mix about 1 part syrup with 5 to 7 parts cold sparkling or still water for a Waldmeister spritzer, or add a splash to white wine, prosecco, lemonade, or gin and tonic. Blend with ice for slushies or drizzle over ice cream. Keep the bottle cool and out of sunlight, close it tightly after each use, and refrigerate after opening.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does Waldmeister (woodruff) syrup taste like?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Waldmeister has a sweet, gently herbal flavor often described as a mix of vanilla, fresh hay, and green herbs with a light floral finish. It is the taste of German Waldmeister soda, green jelly, and Maibowle, the traditional May wine punch. The syrup is bright green and turns any drink the same color.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Mühlhäuser Waldmeister Syrup imported from Germany?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. This is the genuine Mühlhäuser syrup made in Germany, sold there for Waldmeister Schorle, Brause, and Maibowle. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so customers in the United States and Canada receive the same 500 mL bottle sold in German supermarkets.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Mühlhäuser","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45764989223103,"sku":"MUHLHAUSER-WALDMEISTER-SYRUP-169FLOZ-SINGLE","price":7.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45764989255871,"sku":"MUHLHAUSER-WALDMEISTER-SYRUP-169FLOZ-PACK3","price":21.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45764989288639,"sku":"MUHLHAUSER-WALDMEISTER-SYRUP-169FLOZ-PACK6","price":39.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/wm1.png?v=1778970688"},{"product_id":"fiji-natural-artesian-bottled-water-50-7oz-1-5l","title":"FIJI Natural Artesian Bottled Water, 50.7 fl oz (1.5L)","description":"\u003cp\u003eFIJI Natural Artesian Water is a 50.7 fl oz (1.5 L) bottle of still artesian water drawn from a protected underground aquifer in the Fiji Islands, naturally filtered through volcanic rock and bottled at the source with a natural pH of 7.7. It is the largest single-serve FIJI bottle, available as a single or in 3-Pack and 6-Pack options, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFIJI Natural Artesian Water 1.5 L: Volcanic-Filtered Water Bottled at the Source\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNatural artesian source\u003c\/strong\u003e — rain filters for years through volcanic rock into a sealed aquifer on Viti Levu, and the water is bottled there\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNatural pH 7.7\u003c\/strong\u003e — slightly alkaline straight from the aquifer, with nothing added to adjust it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNaturally occurring minerals\u003c\/strong\u003e — the label analysis lists silica 93 mg\/L, calcium 18 mg\/L, magnesium 15 mg\/L, bicarbonate 152 mg\/L, and 222 mg\/L total dissolved solids\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSoft, smooth taste\u003c\/strong\u003e — the high silica content is what gives FIJI its signature rounded mouthfeel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e50.7 fl oz (1.5 L) bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — the largest FIJI single bottle, BPA-free, sized for a full day, a hike, or a long drive\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, 3-Pack, and 6-Pack for the fridge, the car, or the office\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDrink it chilled or at room temperature; the smooth, low-bitterness profile makes it a good match for meals and for brewing tea or pour-over coffee. The 1.5 L bottle fits most car cup holders and backpack side pockets, so it works as a day bottle. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from sunlight, heat, and chemicals such as cleaning products, which can affect taste through the plastic. After opening, recap and refrigerate, and finish within a few days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout FIJI Water\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFIJI Water has been bottled since 1996 at a single source in the Yaqara Valley on Viti Levu, the largest of the Fiji Islands, and the company ships the finished bottles from Fiji to markets around the world. The brand is owned by The Wonderful Company of Los Angeles, which also produces POM Wonderful and Wonderful Pistachios. FIJI is a fixture in hotels, restaurants, and airport shops and is sold in sizes from 330 mL to this 1.5 L bottle. Browse more bottled waters and sodas in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.fijiwater.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003efijiwater.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes FIJI Natural Artesian Water contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. FIJI Water is natural artesian water with one ingredient and no added flavors, sweeteners, or colors, so it contains none of the major food allergens. The bottle carries a printed mineral analysis listing naturally occurring silica, calcium, magnesium, and bicarbonate. Read the label on the bottle for the current analysis, since figures are updated as the source is retested.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store and serve FIJI Water 1.5 L?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eStore unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from direct sunlight, heat, and strong-smelling household chemicals, which can affect taste through the plastic. Serve chilled or at room temperature; it is still water, so it will not fizz. After opening, recap the bottle, keep it refrigerated, and finish it within a few days for the cleanest taste.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between the FIJI 1.5 L bottle and the 500 mL bottle?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBoth contain the same artesian water from the same Fijian aquifer with the same pH 7.7 and mineral profile. The 50.7 fl oz (1.5 L) bottle is the largest single-serve FIJI size, three times the 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle, so it suits all-day hydration, road trips, and the dinner table. The 500 mL bottle is the grab-and-go size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere does FIJI Water come from?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eFIJI Water is drawn from a protected artesian aquifer in the Yaqara Valley on Viti Levu, the main island of Fiji, and bottled at the source. Rain filters slowly through layers of volcanic rock before collecting underground, which is where the water picks up its silica and minerals. The sealed bottles are then shipped from Fiji to the United States.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does FIJI Natural Artesian Water contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. FIJI Water is natural artesian water with one ingredient and no added flavors, sweeteners, or colors, so it contains none of the major food allergens. The bottle carries a printed mineral analysis listing naturally occurring silica, calcium, magnesium, and bicarbonate. Read the label on the bottle for the current analysis, since figures are updated as the source is retested.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store and serve FIJI Water 1.5 L?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Store unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from direct sunlight, heat, and strong-smelling household chemicals, which can affect taste through the plastic. Serve chilled or at room temperature; it is still water, so it will not fizz. After opening, recap the bottle, keep it refrigerated, and finish it within a few days for the cleanest taste.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between the FIJI 1.5 L bottle and the 500 mL bottle?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Both contain the same artesian water from the same Fijian aquifer with the same pH 7.7 and mineral profile. The 50.7 fl oz (1.5 L) bottle is the largest single-serve FIJI size, three times the 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle, so it suits all-day hydration, road trips, and the dinner table. The 500 mL bottle is the grab-and-go size.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where does FIJI Water come from?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"FIJI Water is drawn from a protected artesian aquifer in the Yaqara Valley on Viti Levu, the main island of Fiji, and bottled at the source. Rain filters slowly through layers of volcanic rock before collecting underground, which is where the water picks up its silica and minerals. The sealed bottles are then shipped from Fiji to the United States.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Fiji","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45606736527551,"sku":"FIJI-ARTESIAN-BOTTLED-WATER-507FLOZ-SINGLE","price":4.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3-Pack","offer_id":45606736560319,"sku":"FIJI-ARTESIAN-BOTTLED-WATER-507FLOZ-PACK3","price":13.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"6-Pack","offer_id":45606736593087,"sku":"FIJI-ARTESIAN-BOTTLED-WATER-507FLOZ-PACK6","price":24.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/fiji_water_11390092_1.png?v=1778965601"},{"product_id":"nescafe-tasters-choice-house-blend-decaf-instant-coffee-14oz","title":"Nescafe Taster's Choice House Blend Decaf Instant Coffee 14 oz — Light Roast","description":"\u003cp\u003eNescafé Taster's Choice House Blend Decaf is a 14 oz jar of freeze-dried decaffeinated instant coffee with a light roast, smooth house blend flavor that dissolves instantly in hot or cold water, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eNescafé Taster's Choice Decaf: Freeze-Dried Light Roast Instant Coffee\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDecaffeinated\u003c\/strong\u003e — a decaf instant coffee for drinking any time of day without a full caffeine dose\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLight roast house blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — a smooth, balanced flavor blended for a consistent cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFreeze-dried process\u003c\/strong\u003e — the flash-freeze method is used to preserve aroma and flavor in the crystals\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDissolves instantly\u003c\/strong\u003e — mixes into hot or cold water with a spoon, no brewing equipment needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e14 oz jar\u003c\/strong\u003e — a large jar sized for regular daily use at home or in the office\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTaster's Choice line\u003c\/strong\u003e — part of Nescafé's long-running instant coffee range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdd about 1 teaspoon of crystals to 6 fl oz of hot water and stir until dissolved, adjusting the amount to taste for a stronger or milder cup. For iced coffee, dissolve 1 to 2 teaspoons in a small amount of hot water, then pour over ice and add cold water, milk, or creamer as desired. Keep the jar tightly closed in a cool, dry place away from moisture and direct sunlight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Nescafé\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNescafé is the instant coffee brand of Nestlé, with a Taster's Choice line sold in the United States for decades and known for its freeze-dried crystals, which are made using a flash-freeze process designed to hold onto more of the coffee's original aroma than standard spray-drying. The House Blend Decaf uses the same freeze-dried process as the regular House Blend, with the caffeine removed.  Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.nescafe.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003enescafe.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Nescafé Taster's Choice House Blend Decaf completely caffeine free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eDecaffeination removes the large majority of caffeine, but like most decaf coffees a very small trace amount can remain in the finished jar. It is a reasonable choice for people cutting back on caffeine, but anyone with a strict medical requirement for zero caffeine should read the printed label and check with their doctor before relying on it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store Nescafé Taster's Choice Decaf after opening?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep the jar tightly closed at room temperature, away from moisture, heat, and direct sunlight, ideally in a pantry rather than near the stove. Freeze-dried crystals can clump if they pick up humidity, so always use a dry spoon when scooping coffee out of the jar and reseal the lid right away.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does freeze-dried mean for Nescafé Taster's Choice Decaf?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eFreeze-drying is a process where brewed coffee is frozen and then dried under vacuum, which is designed to preserve more of the coffee's original aroma and flavor compounds than standard spray-drying. Taster's Choice uses this method for both its regular and decaf House Blend, giving the decaf a fuller flavor than many basic instant coffees.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat sizes are available for Nescafé Taster's Choice House Blend Decaf?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eReal Prime Deals currently carries the 14 oz jar of Nescafé Taster's Choice House Blend Decaf as a single item. It is a practical size for a household or small office that drinks decaf coffee regularly, since the jar keeps well in the pantry between uses as long as it stays sealed and dry.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Nescafé Taster's Choice House Blend Decaf completely caffeine free?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Decaffeination removes the large majority of caffeine, but like most decaf coffees a very small trace amount can remain in the finished jar. It is a reasonable choice for people cutting back on caffeine, but anyone with a strict medical requirement for zero caffeine should read the printed label and check with their doctor before relying on it.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store Nescafé Taster's Choice Decaf after opening?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Keep the jar tightly closed at room temperature, away from moisture, heat, and direct sunlight, ideally in a pantry rather than near the stove. Freeze-dried crystals can clump if they pick up humidity, so always use a dry spoon when scooping coffee out of the jar and reseal the lid right away.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does freeze-dried mean for Nescafé Taster's Choice Decaf?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Freeze-drying is a process where brewed coffee is frozen and then dried under vacuum, which is designed to preserve more of the coffee's original aroma and flavor compounds than standard spray-drying. Taster's Choice uses this method for both its regular and decaf House Blend, giving the decaf a fuller flavor than many basic instant coffees.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What sizes are available for Nescafé Taster's Choice House Blend Decaf?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Real Prime Deals currently carries the 14 oz jar of Nescafé Taster's Choice House Blend Decaf as a single item. It is a practical size for a household or small office that drinks decaf coffee regularly, since the jar keeps well in the pantry between uses as long as it stays sealed and dry.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Nescafé","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43569196368063,"sku":"NESCAFE-TC-DECAF-14OZ-SINGLE","price":46.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/71C3DSzxC8L._SL1500.jpg?v=1778965611"},{"product_id":"folgers-classic-roast-instant-coffee-16-oz","title":"Folgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee 16 oz","description":"\u003cp\u003eFolgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee is a 16 oz (453 g) jar of medium-roast instant coffee crystals made from 100 percent pure coffee, dissolving in hot or cold water with no coffee maker required. The jar makes roughly 270 cups at one teaspoon per 6 fl oz serving, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFolgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee: Medium Roast Crystals in a 16 oz Jar\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100 percent pure coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — the only ingredient is coffee; Folgers uses its Mountain Grown beans for the Classic Roast profile\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMedium roast\u003c\/strong\u003e — the same smooth, balanced Classic Roast flavor as the ground coffee, without the bitterness of a dark roast\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDissolves in hot or cold water\u003c\/strong\u003e — stir into hot water for a quick cup or into cold water and ice for instant iced coffee\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16 oz (453 g) jar, about 270 cups\u003c\/strong\u003e — one teaspoon per 6 fl oz cup; the large jar is the value size for households and offices\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFlip-top jar with seal\u003c\/strong\u003e — the plastic jar has an easy-open flip lid that keeps the crystals dry between uses\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffeinated\u003c\/strong\u003e — regular coffee, not decaf\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdd one rounded teaspoon of crystals to a mug, pour in 6 fl oz (180 mL) of hot water, and stir until dissolved; use two teaspoons for a stronger cup. For iced coffee, dissolve the crystals in a splash of cold water first, then top with cold water, ice, and milk. The crystals also work in baking and desserts, such as tiramisu or coffee frosting, where you need coffee flavor without extra liquid. Keep the jar tightly closed in a cool, dry cupboard, use a dry spoon every time, and avoid the refrigerator, where moisture can cake the crystals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Folgers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFolgers began in San Francisco in 1850 and has been one of the best-selling coffee brands in the United States for decades. Today the brand belongs to The J.M. Smucker Company and its coffee is roasted and packed in New Orleans, Louisiana, in what is one of the largest coffee plants in the country. The Classic Roast blend, the red canister, and the jingle about the best part of waking up are all long-running Folgers signatures. Browse more coffee, tea, and drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.folgerscoffee.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003efolgerscoffee.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Folgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Folgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee lists a single ingredient, 100 percent pure coffee, and contains no milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or added sweeteners. It is plain coffee that you flavor yourself with milk, cream, or sugar. As with any packaged food, read the printed label on the jar for the current ingredient and allergen statement before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I make coffee with Folgers instant crystals?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePut one rounded teaspoon of crystals in a mug, add 6 fl oz (180 mL) of hot water, and stir until dissolved; use more crystals for a stronger cup. For iced coffee, dissolve the crystals in a little cold water, then add ice, cold water, and milk. Keep the jar sealed in a dry cupboard and use a dry spoon.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Folgers Instant and Folgers ground coffee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBoth use the Classic Roast medium-roast profile, but the instant version is brewed coffee that has been dried into crystals, so it dissolves completely with no grounds, filter, or machine. Ground Folgers must be brewed in a drip maker, percolator, or French press and yields a fuller body. Instant is the pick for speed, travel, camping, and recipes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Folgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eFolgers roasts and packs its coffee in the United States at its New Orleans, Louisiana, plant, which has been the brand's main production site for decades. The beans themselves are imported green from coffee-growing regions and then roasted, brewed, and dried into crystals domestically. This 16 oz jar is the standard US retail size, not a reformulated export version.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Folgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Folgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee lists a single ingredient, 100 percent pure coffee, and contains no milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or added sweeteners. It is plain coffee that you flavor yourself with milk, cream, or sugar. As with any packaged food, read the printed label on the jar for the current ingredient and allergen statement before use.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I make coffee with Folgers instant crystals?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Put one rounded teaspoon of crystals in a mug, add 6 fl oz (180 mL) of hot water, and stir until dissolved; use more crystals for a stronger cup. For iced coffee, dissolve the crystals in a little cold water, then add ice, cold water, and milk. Keep the jar sealed in a dry cupboard and use a dry spoon.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Folgers Instant and Folgers ground coffee?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Both use the Classic Roast medium-roast profile, but the instant version is brewed coffee that has been dried into crystals, so it dissolves completely with no grounds, filter, or machine. Ground Folgers must be brewed in a drip maker, percolator, or French press and yields a fuller body. Instant is the pick for speed, travel, camping, and recipes.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Folgers Classic Roast Instant Coffee made?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Folgers roasts and packs its coffee in the United States at its New Orleans, Louisiana, plant, which has been the brand's main production site for decades. The beans themselves are imported green from coffee-growing regions and then roasted, brewed, and dried into crystals domestically. This 16 oz jar is the standard US retail size, not a reformulated export version.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Folgers","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43569375707327,"sku":"FOLGERS-CLASSIC-INSTANT-16OZ","price":23.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/Folgers.jpg?v=1778965606"},{"product_id":"nescafe-tasters-choice-house-blend-instant-coffee-14oz","title":"Nescafe Taster's Choice House Blend Instant Coffee 14 oz — Light Roast","description":"\u003cp\u003eNescafé Taster's Choice House Blend Instant Coffee is a 14 oz jar of light roast instant coffee, freeze-dried from 100% pure coffee for a smooth, balanced cup that dissolves instantly in hot or cold water. One jar makes up to 200 cups, and it ships fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNescafé Taster's Choice House Blend: Light Roast Freeze-Dried Instant Coffee\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLight Roast House Blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — a smooth, balanced light-roast blend for a consistent, easy-drinking cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFreeze-dried process\u003c\/strong\u003e — the flash-freeze method used to make Taster's Choice is meant to hold onto more aroma than a spray-dried instant coffee\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100% pure coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — made from coffee only, with no fillers or added ingredients\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDissolves instantly\u003c\/strong\u003e — mixes fully in hot or cold water, so no brewing equipment is needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e14 oz jar, up to 200 cups\u003c\/strong\u003e — a large-format jar sized for regular daily use\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eResealable jar\u003c\/strong\u003e — keeps the jar closed between uses to help protect freshness\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdd about 1 teaspoon to 6 fl oz of hot water and stir until fully dissolved, adjusting the amount up or down to taste. For iced coffee, dissolve 1 to 2 teaspoons in a small amount of hot water first, then pour over ice and add cold water, milk, or creamer. Close the jar tightly after each use and store it in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Nescafé\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNescafé is Nestlé's long-running instant coffee brand, and Taster's Choice is one of its instant coffee lines sold in the US. The House Blend is a light roast built from a blend of coffees and finished with a freeze-dried process, aiming for a smooth, balanced cup without any brewing equipment. For exact sourcing and roasting details, read the label on the jar. Explore more in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.nescafe.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003enescafe.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Nescafé Taster's Choice House Blend contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe jar lists 100% pure coffee as the ingredient, with no other ingredients declared on the label we have on file. Coffee is not a major labeled allergen, but manufacturing facilities can process multiple products, so anyone with a specific concern should read the printed label on the jar before use, since facility notices can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow many cups does a 14 oz jar make?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe 14 oz jar is sized to make up to 200 cups, based on roughly 1 teaspoon of coffee per 6 fl oz of hot water. The exact number of cups will vary with how strong you like your coffee, since using more or less coffee per cup changes how many servings the jar provides overall.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between the House Blend and Nescafé Clásico?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eHouse Blend is a lighter roast aimed at a smooth, balanced everyday cup, while Clásico is a dark roast built for a bolder, more intense flavor. Both are 100% pure instant coffee from Nescafé that dissolve in hot or cold water, so the main difference between the two is roast level and resulting taste.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eCan I make iced coffee with Nescafé Taster's Choice?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Dissolve 1 to 2 teaspoons in a small amount of hot water so the crystals fully dissolve, then pour the concentrate over a glass of ice and top with cold water, milk, or creamer to taste. Because it is a freeze-dried instant coffee, it mixes quickly without needing to brew a fresh pot first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Does Nescafé Taster's Choice House Blend contain allergens?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The jar lists 100% pure coffee as the ingredient, with no other ingredients declared on the label we have on file. Coffee is not a major labeled allergen, but manufacturing facilities can process multiple products, so anyone with a specific concern should read the printed label on the jar before use, since facility notices can change between production runs.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How many cups does a 14 oz jar make?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"The 14 oz jar is sized to make up to 200 cups, based on roughly 1 teaspoon of coffee per 6 fl oz of hot water. The exact number of cups will vary with how strong you like your coffee, since using more or less coffee per cup changes how many servings the jar provides overall.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What is the difference between the House Blend and Nescafé Clásico?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"House Blend is a lighter roast aimed at a smooth, balanced everyday cup, while Clásico is a dark roast built for a bolder, more intense flavor. Both are 100% pure instant coffee from Nescafé that dissolve in hot or cold water, so the main difference between the two is roast level and resulting taste.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Can I make iced coffee with Nescafé Taster's Choice?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. Dissolve 1 to 2 teaspoons in a small amount of hot water so the crystals fully dissolve, then pour the concentrate over a glass of ice and top with cold water, milk, or creamer to taste. Because it is a freeze-dried instant coffee, it mixes quickly without needing to brew a fresh pot first.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Nescafé","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43569377411263,"sku":"NESCAFE-TC-HOUSEBLEND-14OZ-SINGLE","price":39.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/T.jpg?v=1778965609"},{"product_id":"cafe-bustelo-coffee-espresso-ground-coffee-brick-10-ounces-4-count","title":"Café Bustelo Coffee, Espresso Ground Coffee Brick, 10 Ounces, 4 Count","description":"\u003cp\u003eCafé Bustelo Espresso Ground Coffee is a 4-count pack of 10 oz (283 g) vacuum-sealed bricks, 40 oz (1.13 kg) in total, of finely ground dark-roast espresso-style coffee that brews in a moka pot, espresso machine, or ordinary drip maker. It is the classic yellow-and-red brick sold in Latin grocery stores across the United States, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCafé Bustelo Espresso Ground Coffee: Dark Roast Bricks for Cafecito and Café con Leche\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDark roast, espresso-style grind\u003c\/strong\u003e — finely ground for a bold, full-bodied cup with the intensity to stand up to milk and sugar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFour 10 oz (283 g) vacuum-packed bricks\u003c\/strong\u003e — 40 oz total; each brick stays sealed and fresh until you open it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100 percent pure coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — no additives or flavorings; the brick lists coffee as its only ingredient\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBrews any way you like\u003c\/strong\u003e — moka pot, espresso machine, drip coffee maker, French press, or pour-over\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCuban-style coffee heritage\u003c\/strong\u003e — the brand behind cafecito, colada, and café con leche since 1928\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffeinated\u003c\/strong\u003e — regular dark roast, not decaf\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor a stovetop moka pot, fill the basket loosely and level it without tamping, use cold water to the valve line, and brew over medium heat until the coffee sputters. For drip, use about two tablespoons per 6 fl oz of water. For a Cuban cafecito, whip the first few drops of brewed coffee with sugar into a thick paste, then stir in the rest; add steamed milk for café con leche. Once a brick is opened, transfer the grounds to an airtight container and keep it in a cool, dark cupboard, not the refrigerator, and use within two to three weeks for the best aroma.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Café Bustelo\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCafé Bustelo was founded in 1928 in East Harlem, New York, by Gregorio Bustelo, a Spanish immigrant who had lived in Cuba and roasted coffee to suit the Caribbean and Latin American communities around him. The bright yellow can and brick became fixtures in bodegas and Latin kitchens across the United States, and the brand is now owned by The J.M. Smucker Company. Its espresso-style ground coffee remains the standard for home cafecito. Browse more coffee, tea, and drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.cafebustelo.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ecafebustelo.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Café Bustelo Espresso Ground Coffee contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Café Bustelo Espresso is 100 percent pure ground coffee with no added flavorings, dairy, nuts, soy, or wheat, so it contains none of the major food allergens on its own. What you add at the cup, such as milk or condensed milk, is up to you. Read the printed label on the brick for the current ingredient statement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Café Bustelo, and how should I store the bricks?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUse a stovetop moka pot with the basket filled loosely and untamped, an espresso machine, or a drip maker at about two tablespoons per 6 fl oz of water. Keep unopened bricks in a cool, dry cupboard. After opening, move the grounds to an airtight container away from heat and light and use them within two to three weeks.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Café Bustelo bricks and the Café Bustelo can?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe coffee inside is the same dark-roast, espresso-style grind. The 10 oz brick is vacuum-packed foil, compact and stackable, and stays sealed until you open it, which is why this 4-count pack suits stocking up. The can has a resealable plastic lid that is easier to scoop from day to day. Many households buy bricks and refill an empty can.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Café Bustelo coffee made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eCafé Bustelo is a US brand, founded in New York City in 1928 and now roasted and packed in the United States by The J.M. Smucker Company. The green coffee is sourced from growing regions abroad and roasted dark domestically. This 4-count pack of 10 oz bricks is the standard US retail format sold in supermarkets and bodegas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Café Bustelo Espresso Ground Coffee contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Café Bustelo Espresso is 100 percent pure ground coffee with no added flavorings, dairy, nuts, soy, or wheat, so it contains none of the major food allergens on its own. What you add at the cup, such as milk or condensed milk, is up to you. Read the printed label on the brick for the current ingredient statement.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew Café Bustelo, and how should I store the bricks?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Use a stovetop moka pot with the basket filled loosely and untamped, an espresso machine, or a drip maker at about two tablespoons per 6 fl oz of water. Keep unopened bricks in a cool, dry cupboard. After opening, move the grounds to an airtight container away from heat and light and use them within two to three weeks.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Café Bustelo bricks and the Café Bustelo can?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The coffee inside is the same dark-roast, espresso-style grind. The 10 oz brick is vacuum-packed foil, compact and stackable, and stays sealed until you open it, which is why this 4-count pack suits stocking up. The can has a resealable plastic lid that is easier to scoop from day to day. Many households buy bricks and refill an empty can.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Café Bustelo coffee made?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Café Bustelo is a US brand, founded in New York City in 1928 and now roasted and packed in the United States by The J.M. Smucker Company. The green coffee is sourced from growing regions abroad and roasted dark domestically. This 4-count pack of 10 oz bricks is the standard US retail format sold in supermarkets and bodegas.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Café Bustelo","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43570945753279,"sku":"BUSTELO-ESPRESSO-GROUND-4X10OZ","price":28.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/b1.jpg?v=1778965706"},{"product_id":"chock-full-o-nuts-original-blend-ground-coffee-48oz","title":"Chock Full O Nuts Original Blend Ground Coffee 48 Ounce Can","description":"\u003cp\u003eChock Full O' Nuts Original Blend Ground Coffee is a 48 oz (1.36 kg) can of medium-roast ground coffee, the New York coffee brand's flagship blend since 1932, ground for automatic drip, percolator, and pour-over brewing. It is the family-size can that runs a busy kitchen for weeks, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eChock Full O' Nuts Original Blend: New York Medium Roast Ground Coffee, 48 oz Can\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOriginal Blend medium roast\u003c\/strong\u003e — smooth, balanced, and never bitter; the same everyday New York cup the brand built its name on\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e48 oz (1.36 kg) can\u003c\/strong\u003e — the large family size, with a resealable plastic lid that keeps the grounds fresh between pots\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100 percent coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — no fillers, flavorings, or, despite the name, any nuts; the only ingredient is coffee\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAll-purpose grind\u003c\/strong\u003e — labeled for automatic drip, percolator, and drip brewing; it also works in a French press or pour-over\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNew York heritage since 1932\u003c\/strong\u003e — first sold in the brand's Manhattan lunch counters and still marketed as the Heavenly Coffee\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffeinated\u003c\/strong\u003e — regular medium roast, not decaf or half-caffeine\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse one level tablespoon of grounds per 6 fl oz of cold, fresh water in an automatic drip maker, or a rounded tablespoon per cup for a percolator, and adjust to taste. It also brews well in a French press with a four-minute steep or as cold brew at about one cup of grounds per four cups of water steeped overnight. Keep the can tightly closed in a cool, dark cupboard; do not refrigerate, since moisture and odors dull the coffee. Try to use an opened can within a month for the fullest aroma.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Chock Full O' Nuts\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChock Full O' Nuts began in 1926 as a chain of New York City nut shops founded by William Black and turned to coffee in 1932, when the shops became lunch counters serving a nickel cup of coffee. The canned coffee followed and became a household name across the Northeast, helped by its Heavenly Coffee jingle. The brand is now owned by Massimo Zanetti Beverage USA and its coffee is roasted in the United States. Browse more coffee, tea, and drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.chockfullonuts.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003echockfullonuts.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Chock Full O' Nuts Original Blend contain nuts or other allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Despite the name, Chock Full O' Nuts Original Blend contains no nuts and is 100 percent ground coffee with no added flavorings, dairy, soy, or wheat, so it contains none of the major food allergens. The name comes from the company's origin as a chain of nut shops. Read the printed label for the current ingredient statement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Chock Full O' Nuts coffee, and how should I store the can?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUse one level tablespoon per 6 fl oz of cold water in an automatic drip maker or percolator and adjust to taste; the grind also suits French press and pour-over. Keep the can tightly closed with its plastic lid in a cool, dark cupboard, not the refrigerator. Finish an opened can within about a month for the best aroma.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Original Blend and the other Chock Full O' Nuts roasts?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eOriginal Blend is the medium roast and the brand's classic all-day cup, balanced with no bitterness. New York Roast is a bolder medium-dark roast, French Roast is darker with a smoky edge, 100 percent Colombian uses single-origin beans for a brighter flavor, and Half Caff cuts the caffeine roughly in half. Original Blend suits a household with mixed tastes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Chock Full O' Nuts coffee made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eChock Full O' Nuts is an American brand born in New York City in 1932 and its coffee is roasted and canned in the United States by Massimo Zanetti Beverage USA. The beans are sourced from coffee-growing regions abroad and roasted domestically. This 48 oz can is the standard US family-size format sold in supermarkets and warehouse clubs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Chock Full O' Nuts Original Blend contain nuts or other allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Despite the name, Chock Full O' Nuts Original Blend contains no nuts and is 100 percent ground coffee with no added flavorings, dairy, soy, or wheat, so it contains none of the major food allergens. The name comes from the company's origin as a chain of nut shops. Read the printed label for the current ingredient statement.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew Chock Full O' Nuts coffee, and how should I store the can?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Use one level tablespoon per 6 fl oz of cold water in an automatic drip maker or percolator and adjust to taste; the grind also suits French press and pour-over. Keep the can tightly closed with its plastic lid in a cool, dark cupboard, not the refrigerator. Finish an opened can within about a month for the best aroma.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Original Blend and the other Chock Full O' Nuts roasts?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Original Blend is the medium roast and the brand's classic all-day cup, balanced with no bitterness. New York Roast is a bolder medium-dark roast, French Roast is darker with a smoky edge, 100 percent Colombian uses single-origin beans for a brighter flavor, and Half Caff cuts the caffeine roughly in half. Original Blend suits a household with mixed tastes.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Chock Full O' Nuts coffee made?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Chock Full O' Nuts is an American brand born in New York City in 1932 and its coffee is roasted and canned in the United States by Massimo Zanetti Beverage USA. The beans are sourced from coffee-growing regions abroad and roasted domestically. This 48 oz can is the standard US family-size format sold in supermarkets and warehouse clubs.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Chock Full O' Nuts","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43570955288767,"sku":"CHOCKFULL-ORIGBLEND-48OZ","price":37.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/C1_5f54bef9-9110-46de-ab7f-9254cc040811.jpg?v=1778965713"},{"product_id":"dunkin-original-blend-ground-coffee-medium-roast-40oz","title":"Dunkin' Original Blend Ground Coffee, Medium Roast, 40 oz","description":"\u003cp\u003eDunkin' Original Blend Ground Coffee is a 40 oz (2.5 lb, 1.13 kg) bag of the medium roast coffee served in Dunkin' shops, made with 100 percent Arabica beans and ground for drip and pour-over brewing. It is fully caffeinated and sold as a single 40 oz bag, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eDunkin' Original Blend Ground Coffee: The Medium Roast Served in Dunkin' Shops\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100 percent Arabica beans\u003c\/strong\u003e — selected for a smooth, balanced cup without harsh bitterness\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMedium roast\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Original Blend roast level, sitting between light and dark for a rounded, familiar flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePre-ground for drip brewing\u003c\/strong\u003e — suited to automatic drip makers, pour-over, and most standard home brewers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFully caffeinated\u003c\/strong\u003e — the regular, not decaf, version of Dunkin' Original Blend\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e40 oz (2.5 lb, 1.13 kg) bag\u003c\/strong\u003e — a large-format bag for households and offices that brew every day\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eResealable bag\u003c\/strong\u003e — fold and seal after each use to keep the grounds fresh\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse 1 tablespoon of ground coffee for every 6 fl oz of cold, filtered water, and adjust up or down to taste. Brew in an automatic drip coffee maker, pour-over cone, or French press with a medium grind setting already applied. For iced coffee, brew at double strength and pour over ice. Keep the bag tightly sealed in a cool, dry cupboard away from heat, light, and moisture, and avoid storing it in the refrigerator, which introduces condensation. Use the grounds within a few weeks of opening for the freshest cup.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Dunkin'\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDunkin' opened its first shop in Quincy, Massachusetts, in 1950 and has grown into one of the largest coffee and doughnut chains in the United States, with thousands of locations. Original Blend is the medium roast coffee that has anchored its menu for decades, and the packaged version is sold in supermarkets so customers can brew the same blend at home. Dunkin' packaged coffee is produced and distributed under license for retail sale. Browse more coffee and pantry items in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.dunkinathome.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003edunkinathome.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Dunkin' Original Blend made with 100 percent Arabica beans, and what roast is it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Dunkin' Original Blend Ground Coffee is made with 100 percent Arabica beans, which are prized for their smoother, less bitter flavor compared with Robusta. It is a medium roast, the same roast level as the Original Blend served in Dunkin' shops, so the cup is balanced and familiar rather than dark or smoky.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Dunkin' Original Blend Ground Coffee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUse 1 tablespoon of grounds for every 6 fl oz of cold, filtered water and adjust to taste. The grind works in automatic drip machines, pour-over cones, and French presses. Brew with water just off the boil, around 195 to 205 F. For iced coffee, brew at double strength and pour it hot over a full glass of ice.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store a 40 oz bag of Dunkin' ground coffee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep the bag tightly sealed in a cool, dry cupboard away from heat, sunlight, and moisture, and fold the top down after each scoop. Avoid the refrigerator, which causes condensation and stale flavors. Because the 40 oz bag lasts a while, you can transfer a portion to an airtight canister and keep the rest sealed until needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Dunkin' Original Blend Ground Coffee caffeinated, and what size is this bag?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. This is the regular, fully caffeinated Original Blend, not the decaf version. The listing is the large 40 oz (2.5 lb, 1.13 kg) bag, which is the bulk size for households and offices that brew daily, and it is sold as a single bag. Ground coffee is ready to brew with no grinder needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Dunkin' Original Blend made with 100 percent Arabica beans, and what roast is it?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. Dunkin' Original Blend Ground Coffee is made with 100 percent Arabica beans, which are prized for their smoother, less bitter flavor compared with Robusta. It is a medium roast, the same roast level as the Original Blend served in Dunkin' shops, so the cup is balanced and familiar rather than dark or smoky.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew Dunkin' Original Blend Ground Coffee?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Use 1 tablespoon of grounds for every 6 fl oz of cold, filtered water and adjust to taste. The grind works in automatic drip machines, pour-over cones, and French presses. Brew with water just off the boil, around 195 to 205 F. For iced coffee, brew at double strength and pour it hot over a full glass of ice.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store a 40 oz bag of Dunkin' ground coffee?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Keep the bag tightly sealed in a cool, dry cupboard away from heat, sunlight, and moisture, and fold the top down after each scoop. Avoid the refrigerator, which causes condensation and stale flavors. Because the 40 oz bag lasts a while, you can transfer a portion to an airtight canister and keep the rest sealed until needed.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Dunkin' Original Blend Ground Coffee caffeinated, and what size is this bag?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. This is the regular, fully caffeinated Original Blend, not the decaf version. The listing is the large 40 oz (2.5 lb, 1.13 kg) bag, which is the bulk size for households and offices that brew daily, and it is sold as a single bag. Ground coffee is ready to brew with no grinder needed.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Dunkin'","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43570964857023,"sku":"DUNKIN-ORIGBLEND-GROUND-40OZ","price":40.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/dunkin.webp?v=1778970233"},{"product_id":"folgers-classic-roast-coffee-2-pack-of-43-5-ounces-2-pack","title":"Folgers Classic Roast Coffee, 43.5 Ounces","description":"\u003cp\u003eFolgers Classic Roast Ground Coffee is a 43.5 oz (1.23 kg) canister of medium-roast ground coffee made from 100 percent pure coffee, packed in the red Folgers AromaSeal canister and sized to brew up to 400 six-ounce cups. It is the largest everyday Folgers canister, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFolgers Classic Roast Ground Coffee: Medium Roast in the 43.5 oz AromaSeal Canister\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMedium roast, smooth and balanced\u003c\/strong\u003e — the Classic Roast profile that has anchored the Folgers line for generations, mild enough for all-day drinking\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e43.5 oz (1.23 kg) canister, up to 400 cups\u003c\/strong\u003e — the family-size can, with a scoop line and grip handles molded into the sides\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100 percent pure coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — Mountain Grown beans, no additives or flavorings; coffee is the only ingredient\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAromaSeal canister\u003c\/strong\u003e — the flexible plastic can with a snap-tight lid that Folgers designed to keep grounds fresh after opening\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAll-purpose grind\u003c\/strong\u003e — suited to automatic drip makers, percolators, pour-over cones, and French press\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffeinated\u003c\/strong\u003e — regular Classic Roast, not decaf\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse one level tablespoon of grounds per 6 fl oz of cold, fresh water for a standard cup, or up to two tablespoons for a stronger brew, in an automatic drip maker, percolator, or French press. For cold brew, steep one cup of grounds in four cups of cold water for 12 to 18 hours and strain. Press the lid firmly closed after every scoop and keep the canister in a cool, dark cupboard, never the refrigerator or freezer, where moisture and odors dull the flavor. Try to use an opened canister within a month.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Folgers\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFolgers began in San Francisco in 1850 and has been one of the best-selling coffee brands in the United States for decades. Today the brand belongs to The J.M. Smucker Company and its coffee is roasted and packed in New Orleans, Louisiana, in what is one of the largest coffee plants in the country. The Classic Roast blend, the red canister, and the jingle about the best part of waking up are all long-running Folgers signatures. Browse more coffee, tea, and drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.folgerscoffee.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003efolgerscoffee.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Folgers Classic Roast Ground Coffee contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Folgers Classic Roast lists a single ingredient, 100 percent pure coffee, and contains no milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or added flavorings. It is plain ground coffee that you finish with your own milk, cream, or sugar. As with any packaged food, read the printed label on the canister for the current ingredient and allergen statement before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Folgers Classic Roast, and how should I store the canister?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eUse one level tablespoon of grounds per 6 fl oz of cold water in a drip maker or percolator, or two for a stronger cup. Snap the AromaSeal lid closed after each scoop and keep the canister in a cool, dark cupboard rather than the refrigerator. Aim to finish an opened canister within about a month for the fullest aroma.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Folgers Classic Roast and Folgers Black Silk or Breakfast Blend?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eClassic Roast is the medium roast at the center of the Folgers line, balanced and mild enough to drink all day. Breakfast Blend is a lighter, brighter roast, while Black Silk is a dark roast with a bolder, smokier body. All three are ground the same way and brew identically, so the choice comes down to roast strength.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Folgers Classic Roast Ground Coffee made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eFolgers roasts and packs its coffee in the United States at its New Orleans, Louisiana, plant, the brand's main production site for decades. The beans are imported green from coffee-growing regions and roasted domestically. This 43.5 oz canister is the standard US family-size format sold in supermarkets and warehouse clubs, not an export or reformulated version.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Folgers Classic Roast Ground Coffee contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Folgers Classic Roast lists a single ingredient, 100 percent pure coffee, and contains no milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or added flavorings. It is plain ground coffee that you finish with your own milk, cream, or sugar. As with any packaged food, read the printed label on the canister for the current ingredient and allergen statement before use.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew Folgers Classic Roast, and how should I store the canister?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Use one level tablespoon of grounds per 6 fl oz of cold water in a drip maker or percolator, or two for a stronger cup. Snap the AromaSeal lid closed after each scoop and keep the canister in a cool, dark cupboard rather than the refrigerator. Aim to finish an opened canister within about a month for the fullest aroma.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Folgers Classic Roast and Folgers Black Silk or Breakfast Blend?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Classic Roast is the medium roast at the center of the Folgers line, balanced and mild enough to drink all day. Breakfast Blend is a lighter, brighter roast, while Black Silk is a dark roast with a bolder, smokier body. All three are ground the same way and brew identically, so the choice comes down to roast strength.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Folgers Classic Roast Ground Coffee made?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Folgers roasts and packs its coffee in the United States at its New Orleans, Louisiana, plant, the brand's main production site for decades. The beans are imported green from coffee-growing regions and roasted domestically. This 43.5 oz canister is the standard US family-size format sold in supermarkets and warehouse clubs, not an export or reformulated version.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Folgers","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43570980716735,"sku":"FOLGERS-CLASSIC-ROAST-43-5OZ","price":29.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/1_f8cc4653-af28-4b99-8391-8fbb65dddb44.jpg?v=1778965719"},{"product_id":"cafe-almond-barista-32-fluid-ounces-6-pack","title":"Califa Farms Café Almond Barista 32 Fluid Ounces","description":"\u003cp\u003eCalifia Farms Almond Barista Blend is a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton of dairy-free almond milk formulated for coffee: it steams, froths, and holds foam for lattes and cappuccinos without curdling or bitterness. It is vegan, kosher, Non-GMO Project verified, and carrageenan-free, with a neutral taste that lets the espresso lead, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCalifia Farms Almond Barista Blend: Dairy-Free Almond Milk That Froths for Lattes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBuilt to steam and froth\u003c\/strong\u003e — a barista formulation that produces stable microfoam for latte art and cappuccinos\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo curdling in hot or iced coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — blends smoothly into espresso, cold brew, and drip coffee without splitting\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNeutral, creamy taste\u003c\/strong\u003e — a mild almond profile that complements rather than covers the coffee\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDairy-free, vegan, kosher, Non-GMO Project verified\u003c\/strong\u003e — made without carrageenan or dairy ingredients\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e32 fl oz (946 mL) carton\u003c\/strong\u003e — the standard cafe size, enough for roughly 8 to 12 lattes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMade in the United States\u003c\/strong\u003e — produced by Califia Farms, based in Bakersfield, California\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShake the carton, pour cold milk into a steaming pitcher, and stretch it with the steam wand just below the surface until it reaches about 140 to 150 F (60 to 65 C); swirl and pour for latte art. For iced drinks, pour straight over espresso and ice. It also works in a handheld frother or French press for home cappuccinos. Refrigerate after opening and use within 7 to 10 days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Califia Farms\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCalifia Farms was founded in 2010 in Bakersfield, California, in the heart of the state's almond-growing region, and is named after the mythical queen Califia for whom California was named. The company makes plant-based milks, creamers, cold brew coffee, and barista blends, all dairy-free and vegan. Its products are made in the United States. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.califiafarms.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ecalifiafarms.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Califia Farms Almond Barista Blend contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. It contains almonds, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, or carrageenan and is labeled vegan and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current ingredient list and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store Califia Farms Almond Barista Blend?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eStore the carton according to the printed panel; this format is shelf-stable until opened, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry until the best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it, keep it tightly closed, and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before each use, as light separation is normal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Barista Blend and regular Califia almond milk?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eRegular Califia almond milk is thinner and can split or foam poorly when steamed. The Barista Blend is formulated with a little more body so it stretches into stable, glossy microfoam and holds up in hot espresso without curdling. The taste is deliberately neutral so the coffee, not the milk, comes through.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Califia Farms Almond Barista Blend made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eCalifia Farms is headquartered in Bakersfield, California, in the state's almond-growing region, and its products are made in the United States for the US and Canadian market. This is a domestic product, not an import. The carton is available here as a single 32 fl oz (946 mL) unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Califia Farms Almond Barista Blend contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. It contains almonds, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, or carrageenan and is labeled vegan and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current ingredient list and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store Califia Farms Almond Barista Blend?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Store the carton according to the printed panel; this format is shelf-stable until opened, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry until the best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it, keep it tightly closed, and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before each use, as light separation is normal.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Barista Blend and regular Califia almond milk?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Regular Califia almond milk is thinner and can split or foam poorly when steamed. The Barista Blend is formulated with a little more body so it stretches into stable, glossy microfoam and holds up in hot espresso without curdling. The taste is deliberately neutral so the coffee, not the milk, comes through.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Califia Farms Almond Barista Blend made?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Califia Farms is headquartered in Bakersfield, California, in the state's almond-growing region, and its products are made in the United States for the US and Canadian market. This is a domestic product, not an import. The carton is available here as a single 32 fl oz (946 mL) unit.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Califa Farms","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43570995626175,"sku":"CALIFIA-ALMOND-BARISTA-32OZ","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/m1.jpg?v=1778965733"},{"product_id":"voss-artesian-still-water-12-7-fl-oz-glass-bottle","title":"VOSS Artesian Still Water 12.7 fl oz Glass Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eVOSS Artesian Still Water is a 12.7 fl oz (375 mL) cylindrical glass bottle of still artesian water sourced from an aquifer in Vatnestrøm, Norway, with 0 calories and 0 mg sodium. It is the original Norwegian glass bottle, available as a single or in packs of 3, 6, and 12, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eVOSS Still Water: Norwegian Artesian Water in the Iconic Glass Bottle\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNorwegian artesian source\u003c\/strong\u003e — drawn from a protected underground aquifer in Vatnestrøm, southern Norway\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSingle ingredient\u003c\/strong\u003e — artesian water, with 0 calories and 0 mg sodium per bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMineral profile per liter\u003c\/strong\u003e — calcium 5 mg, magnesium 1 mg, potassium 0 mg, chloride 12 mg, total dissolved solids 290 mg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClean, neutral taste\u003c\/strong\u003e — a soft still water that does not compete with food or wine\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e12.7 fl oz (375 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — the signature cylindrical VOSS bottle, reusable and recyclable\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6, and Pack of 12 for the table, events, and hospitality\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe chilled, straight from the bottle or poured into a glass, at the dinner table, for guests, or at events where the bottle doubles as a table piece. Its neutral taste pairs well with sushi, seafood, cheese boards, and lighter dishes. Store unopened bottles upright in a cool place out of direct sunlight. After opening, cap the bottle and refrigerate; the empty glass bottle can be washed and reused as a carafe or vase, or recycled.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout VOSS\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVOSS Water was launched in 2000 and bottles its water at Vatnestrøm in southern Norway, from an artesian aquifer beneath layers of rock and sand. The brand became known for its cylindrical glass bottle and is served in restaurants, hotels, and retailers in more than 50 countries. VOSS also sells the same water in sparkling form and in recycled PET bottles. Browse more premium waters in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.vosswater.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003evosswater.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the mineral content of VOSS Artesian Still Water?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eAccording to the VOSS label, the water contains, per liter, 5 mg calcium, 1 mg magnesium, 0 mg potassium, and 12 mg chloride, with 290 mg total dissolved solids, and the bottle has 0 calories and 0 mg sodium. The only ingredient is artesian water. This gives a soft, neutral taste with no noticeable mineral aftertaste.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store VOSS Still Water?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it chilled, either straight from the bottle or poured into glasses at the table, where its neutral taste suits sushi, seafood, and cheese. Keep unopened bottles upright in a cool spot away from sunlight and strong odors. Once opened, screw the cap back on and refrigerate. The glass bottle can be reused or recycled.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between VOSS Still in glass and VOSS Still in PET bottles?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBoth contain the same Norwegian artesian water from Vatnestrøm. This 12.7 fl oz (375 mL) glass bottle is the original cylindrical VOSS design, heavier and better suited to the table, restaurants, and gifting. The 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) PET version is lighter, made from recycled plastic, and intended for the gym, travel, and everyday carrying.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs VOSS Still Water imported from Norway, and what pack sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. VOSS is bottled at the source in Vatnestrøm, Norway and imported in its original glass bottle. Real Prime Deals ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so customers in the United States and Canada receive the genuine product. The 12.7 fl oz (375 mL) bottle is sold as a single or in packs of 3, 6, and 12.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the mineral content of VOSS Artesian Still Water?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"According to the VOSS label, the water contains, per liter, 5 mg calcium, 1 mg magnesium, 0 mg potassium, and 12 mg chloride, with 290 mg total dissolved solids, and the bottle has 0 calories and 0 mg sodium. The only ingredient is artesian water. This gives a soft, neutral taste with no noticeable mineral aftertaste.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I serve and store VOSS Still Water?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Serve it chilled, either straight from the bottle or poured into glasses at the table, where its neutral taste suits sushi, seafood, and cheese. Keep unopened bottles upright in a cool spot away from sunlight and strong odors. Once opened, screw the cap back on and refrigerate. The glass bottle can be reused or recycled.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between VOSS Still in glass and VOSS Still in PET bottles?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Both contain the same Norwegian artesian water from Vatnestrøm. This 12.7 fl oz (375 mL) glass bottle is the original cylindrical VOSS design, heavier and better suited to the table, restaurants, and gifting. The 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) PET version is lighter, made from recycled plastic, and intended for the gym, travel, and everyday carrying.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is VOSS Still Water imported from Norway, and what pack sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. VOSS is bottled at the source in Vatnestrøm, Norway and imported in its original glass bottle. Real Prime Deals ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so customers in the United States and Canada receive the genuine product. The 12.7 fl oz (375 mL) bottle is sold as a single or in packs of 3, 6, and 12.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Voss","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45651515048127,"sku":"VOSS-STILL375G-SINGLE","price":3.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45651515080895,"sku":"VOSS-STILL375G-PACK3","price":10.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45651515113663,"sku":"VOSS-STILL375G-PACK6","price":19.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":45651515146431,"sku":"VOSS-STILL375G-PACK12","price":35.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/image_ced87809-b044-4ed9-95d3-123803802a20.png?v=1779549211"},{"product_id":"fiji-natural-artesian-bottled-water-16-9oz-500ml","title":"FIJI Natural Artesian Bottled Water, 16.9 fl oz (500ml)","description":"\u003cp\u003eFIJI Natural Artesian Water is a 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle of still artesian water drawn from a protected underground aquifer in the Fiji Islands, naturally filtered through volcanic rock and bottled at the source with a natural pH of 7.7. It is the everyday grab-and-go FIJI size, available as a single or in 3-Pack, 6-Pack, and 12-Pack options, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFIJI Natural Artesian Water 500 mL: Volcanic-Filtered Water Bottled at the Source\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNatural artesian source\u003c\/strong\u003e — rain filters for years through volcanic rock into a sealed aquifer on Viti Levu, and the water is bottled there\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNatural pH 7.7\u003c\/strong\u003e — slightly alkaline straight from the aquifer, with nothing added to adjust it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNaturally occurring electrolytes\u003c\/strong\u003e — the label lists calcium, magnesium, and potassium picked up from the volcanic rock, never added\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSoft, smooth taste\u003c\/strong\u003e — the silica-rich mineral profile gives FIJI its signature rounded mouthfeel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — the standard single-serve size, BPA-free and made from recycled plastic, sized for bags and lunchboxes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, 3-Pack, 6-Pack, and 12-Pack for the fridge, the office, or events\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDrink it chilled or at room temperature; the smooth, low-bitterness profile suits meals, desk hydration, and hotel-style table service. The 500 mL bottle fits standard cup holders, gym bags, and lunchboxes. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from sunlight, heat, and chemicals such as cleaning products, which can affect taste through the plastic. After opening, recap and refrigerate, and finish within a day or two.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout FIJI Water\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFIJI Water has been bottled since 1996 at a single source in the Yaqara Valley on Viti Levu, the largest of the Fiji Islands, and the company ships the finished bottles from Fiji to markets around the world. The brand is owned by The Wonderful Company of Los Angeles, which also produces POM Wonderful and Wonderful Pistachios. FIJI is a fixture in hotels, restaurants, and airport shops and is sold in sizes from 330 mL to 1.5 L. Browse more bottled waters and sodas in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.fijiwater.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003efijiwater.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes FIJI Natural Artesian Water contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. FIJI Water is natural artesian water with one ingredient and no added flavors, sweeteners, or colors, so it contains none of the major food allergens. The bottle carries a printed mineral analysis listing naturally occurring silica, calcium, magnesium, and potassium. Read the label on the bottle for the current analysis, since figures are updated as the source is retested.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store and serve FIJI Water 500 mL?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eStore unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from direct sunlight, heat, and strong-smelling household chemicals, which can affect taste through the plastic. Serve chilled or at room temperature; it is still water, so it will not fizz. After opening, recap the bottle, keep it refrigerated, and finish it within a day or two for the cleanest taste.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between the FIJI 500 mL bottle and the 1.5 L bottle?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBoth contain the same artesian water from the same Fijian aquifer with the same pH 7.7 and mineral profile. The 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle is the single-serve size for bags, lunchboxes, and events, sold in 12-packs. The 50.7 fl oz (1.5 L) bottle holds three times as much and suits all-day hydration and the dinner table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere does FIJI Water come from?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eFIJI Water is drawn from a protected artesian aquifer in the Yaqara Valley on Viti Levu, the main island of Fiji, and bottled at the source. Rain filters slowly through layers of volcanic rock before collecting underground, which is where the water picks up its silica and minerals. The sealed bottles are then shipped from Fiji to the United States.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does FIJI Natural Artesian Water contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. FIJI Water is natural artesian water with one ingredient and no added flavors, sweeteners, or colors, so it contains none of the major food allergens. The bottle carries a printed mineral analysis listing naturally occurring silica, calcium, magnesium, and potassium. Read the label on the bottle for the current analysis, since figures are updated as the source is retested.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store and serve FIJI Water 500 mL?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Store unopened bottles in a cool, dark place away from direct sunlight, heat, and strong-smelling household chemicals, which can affect taste through the plastic. Serve chilled or at room temperature; it is still water, so it will not fizz. After opening, recap the bottle, keep it refrigerated, and finish it within a day or two for the cleanest taste.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between the FIJI 500 mL bottle and the 1.5 L bottle?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Both contain the same artesian water from the same Fijian aquifer with the same pH 7.7 and mineral profile. The 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle is the single-serve size for bags, lunchboxes, and events, sold in 12-packs. The 50.7 fl oz (1.5 L) bottle holds three times as much and suits all-day hydration and the dinner table.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where does FIJI Water come from?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"FIJI Water is drawn from a protected artesian aquifer in the Yaqara Valley on Viti Levu, the main island of Fiji, and bottled at the source. Rain filters slowly through layers of volcanic rock before collecting underground, which is where the water picks up its silica and minerals. The sealed bottles are then shipped from Fiji to the United States.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Fiji","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45606700646591,"sku":"FIJI-ARTESIAN-BOTTLED-WATER-169FLOZ-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"3-Pack","offer_id":45606700679359,"sku":"FIJI-ARTESIAN-BOTTLED-WATER-169FLOZ-PACK3","price":8.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"6-Pack","offer_id":45606700712127,"sku":"FIJI-ARTESIAN-BOTTLED-WATER-169FLOZ-PACK6","price":15.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"12-Pack","offer_id":45606700744895,"sku":"FIJI-ARTESIAN-BOTTLED-WATER-169FLOZ-PACK12","price":29.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/f1.jpg?v=1778965781"},{"product_id":"nescafe-clasico-instant-coffee-dark-roast-1-jar-10-5-oz","title":"NESCAFÉ CLÁSICO Dark Roast Instant Coffee, 10.5 oz – Makes Up to 150 Cups","description":"\u003cp\u003eNescafé Clásico Dark Roast Instant Coffee is a 10.5 oz jar of 100% pure coffee, dark roasted for a bold, full-bodied cup that dissolves instantly in hot water. One jar makes up to 150 cups, and it ships fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eNescafé Clásico: Dark Roast Instant Coffee for a Bold Cup\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDark Roast\u003c\/strong\u003e — roasted longer than a light or medium roast for a bolder, more intense coffee flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100% pure coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — made from coffee only, with no fillers or additives\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e10.5 oz jar, up to 150 cups\u003c\/strong\u003e — a large-format jar sized for everyday use\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInstant format\u003c\/strong\u003e — dissolves in hot water in seconds, with no coffee maker or filter needed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eResealable jar\u003c\/strong\u003e — reseal after each use to help keep the coffee fresh between servings\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAdd about 1 teaspoon (roughly 2 g) to 6 fl oz of hot water and stir until dissolved, using more or less to reach your preferred strength. It also works well with milk, creamer, or sweetener stirred in, or over ice for a quick iced coffee. Close the jar tightly after each use and store it in a cool, dry place.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Nescafé\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNescafé is Nestlé's long-running instant coffee brand, and Clásico is one of its dark roast lines, widely sold across Latin American and Hispanic grocery sections in the US. It is made from 100% pure coffee with no fillers or additives, roasted dark for a bolder, more concentrated cup. For exact sourcing details, check the label on the jar. Explore more in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.nescafe.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003enescafe.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow many cups does a 10.5 oz jar of Nescafé Clásico make?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eA 10.5 oz jar of Nescafé Clásico is sized to make up to 150 cups of instant coffee when prepared with about 1 teaspoon per 6 fl oz of hot water. Using more coffee per cup for a stronger brew, or less for a milder one, will change the total number of servings the jar provides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Nescafé Clásico 100% pure coffee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The label states that Nescafé Clásico is made from 100% pure coffee, with no fillers or additives listed as ingredients. It is an instant coffee, meaning the brewed coffee has been dried into granules that redissolve when hot water is added, rather than a blend with chicory or other fillers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat roast level is Nescafé Clásico?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNescafé Clásico is a dark roast, which generally produces a bolder, more intense flavor than a light or medium roast. If you prefer a smoother, lighter cup, Nescafé's House Blend line is roasted lighter; Clásico is aimed at drinkers who want a stronger, more robust everyday coffee.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I prepare Nescafé Clásico instant coffee?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eAdd about 1 teaspoon, roughly 2 g, of Nescafé Clásico to 6 fl oz of hot water and stir until it is fully dissolved. Adjust the amount of coffee up or down to reach your preferred strength, and add milk, creamer, or sweetener as desired once the coffee has dissolved completely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\": \"https:\/\/schema.org\", \"@type\": \"FAQPage\", \"mainEntity\": [{\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How many cups does a 10.5 oz jar of Nescafé Clásico make?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"A 10.5 oz jar of Nescafé Clásico is sized to make up to 150 cups of instant coffee when prepared with about 1 teaspoon per 6 fl oz of hot water. Using more coffee per cup for a stronger brew, or less for a milder one, will change the total number of servings the jar provides.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"Is Nescafé Clásico 100% pure coffee?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Yes. The label states that Nescafé Clásico is made from 100% pure coffee, with no fillers or additives listed as ingredients. It is an instant coffee, meaning the brewed coffee has been dried into granules that redissolve when hot water is added, rather than a blend with chicory or other fillers.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"What roast level is Nescafé Clásico?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Nescafé Clásico is a dark roast, which generally produces a bolder, more intense flavor than a light or medium roast. If you prefer a smoother, lighter cup, Nescafé's House Blend line is roasted lighter; Clásico is aimed at drinkers who want a stronger, more robust everyday coffee.\"}}, {\"@type\": \"Question\", \"name\": \"How do I prepare Nescafé Clásico instant coffee?\", \"acceptedAnswer\": {\"@type\": \"Answer\", \"text\": \"Add about 1 teaspoon, roughly 2 g, of Nescafé Clásico to 6 fl oz of hot water and stir until it is fully dissolved. Adjust the amount of coffee up or down to reach your preferred strength, and add milk, creamer, or sweetener as desired once the coffee has dissolved completely.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Nescafé","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":43571328123071,"sku":"NESCAFE-CLASICO-DARK-105OZ","price":18.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/1_9045c812-bc6c-4780-92b9-2f900e1f08f8.jpg?v=1778965783"},{"product_id":"dunkin-original-blend-medium-roast-k-cup-pods-72-count","title":"Dunkin' Original Blend Medium Roast Coffee K-Cup Pods, 72 Count","description":"\u003cp\u003eDunkin' Original Blend Medium Roast Coffee K-Cup Pods is a 72-count box of Keurig Genuine K-Cup pods, 26.6 oz (756 g) net weight, each pod holding 0.37 oz (10.5 g) of Dunkin's signature 100 percent Arabica medium roast. The pods fit all Keurig K-Cup brewers and are sold as one 72-count box, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eDunkin' Original Blend K-Cups: Smooth 100 Percent Arabica Medium Roast at Home\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOriginal Blend medium roast\u003c\/strong\u003e — the same smooth, balanced coffee served in Dunkin' shops, brewed at home\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100 percent Arabica beans\u003c\/strong\u003e — medium roasted for a mild, easy-drinking cup with no bitterness\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e72 Keurig Genuine K-Cup pods\u003c\/strong\u003e — 0.37 oz (10.5 g) per pod, 26.6 oz (756 g) net weight per box\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorks in all Keurig K-Cup brewers\u003c\/strong\u003e — licensed Keurig Genuine pods, not a third-party imitation\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRecyclable pods\u003c\/strong\u003e — peel the lid, empty the grounds, and recycle where facilities accept the pod\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffeinated\u003c\/strong\u003e — regular strength, unflavored coffee\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInsert one pod into your Keurig brewer, close the handle, and select an 8 oz (237 mL) cup for the standard Dunkin' strength; use 6 oz for a bolder cup. Add cream and sugar the way you like it, or brew over ice for a quick iced coffee. After brewing, let the pod cool, peel the lid, empty the grounds, and recycle the cup where accepted. Keep the box in a cool, dry cupboard and use the pods by the best-by date.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Dunkin'\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDunkin' started in 1950 in Quincy, Massachusetts, and grew into one of the largest coffee and baked-goods chains in the world, with thousands of shops across the United States. Its packaged coffee, including these K-Cup pods, is produced under license by The J.M. Smucker Company so home brewers can match the shop taste. Browse more everyday staples in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.dunkinathome.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003edunkinathome.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Dunkin' Original Blend K-Cup coffee contain allergens or additives?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Each pod contains only ground 100 percent Arabica coffee, with no flavorings, sweeteners, or dairy, and no allergens are declared on the box. The coffee is caffeinated. If you have a particular dietary concern, read the printed ingredient statement on the box you receive, since packaging is the final source.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew and store Dunkin' Original Blend K-Cup pods?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one pod in any Keurig K-Cup brewer, close the lid, and select the 8 oz (237 mL) size for regular strength or 6 oz for a stronger cup. Use each pod once. Keep the unopened pods in their box in a cool, dry cupboard away from heat and moisture, and brew them before the best-by date.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Dunkin' Original Blend and Dunkin' Dark Roast?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eOriginal Blend is a medium roast: smooth, balanced, and mild, the flavor most people associate with a cup from the shop. Dunkin' Dark Roast uses the same Arabica beans roasted longer for a bolder, deeper taste with more roasted notes. Choose Original Blend for an everyday cup that takes cream and sugar well.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow many pods come in the box and are they recyclable?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe box holds 72 Keurig Genuine K-Cup pods, each 0.37 oz (10.5 g) for a net weight of 26.6 oz (756 g), enough for more than two months of daily coffee. The pods are recyclable: cool the pod, peel off the lid, empty the grounds, and recycle the plastic cup where local facilities accept it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Dunkin' Original Blend K-Cup coffee contain allergens or additives?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Each pod contains only ground 100 percent Arabica coffee, with no flavorings, sweeteners, or dairy, and no allergens are declared on the box. The coffee is caffeinated. If you have a particular dietary concern, read the printed ingredient statement on the box you receive, since packaging is the final source.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew and store Dunkin' Original Blend K-Cup pods?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Place one pod in any Keurig K-Cup brewer, close the lid, and select the 8 oz (237 mL) size for regular strength or 6 oz for a stronger cup. Use each pod once. Keep the unopened pods in their box in a cool, dry cupboard away from heat and moisture, and brew them before the best-by date.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Dunkin' Original Blend and Dunkin' Dark Roast?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Original Blend is a medium roast: smooth, balanced, and mild, the flavor most people associate with a cup from the shop. Dunkin' Dark Roast uses the same Arabica beans roasted longer for a bolder, deeper taste with more roasted notes. Choose Original Blend for an everyday cup that takes cream and sugar well.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How many pods come in the box and are they recyclable?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The box holds 72 Keurig Genuine K-Cup pods, each 0.37 oz (10.5 g) for a net weight of 26.6 oz (756 g), enough for more than two months of daily coffee. The pods are recyclable: cool the pod, peel off the lid, empty the grounds, and recycle the plastic cup where local facilities accept it.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e","brand":"Dunkin'","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44343792992447,"sku":"DUNKIN-ORIGBLEND-KCUP-72CT","price":74.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/DunkinDonuts.png?v=1778966471"},{"product_id":"starbucks-caffe-verona-dark-roast-coffee-k-cups-72-count-bold-rich-flavor-for-keurig-brewers","title":"Starbucks Caffè Verona Dark Roast Coffee K-Cups – 72 Count | Bold \u0026 Rich Flavor for Keurig Brewers","description":"\u003cp\u003eStarbucks Caffè Verona Dark Roast Coffee K-Cup Pods is a 72-count box of single-serve pods filled with Starbucks' Caffè Verona blend, a dark roast of 100 percent Arabica beans with roasty, dark cocoa notes. The pods work in Keurig K-Cup brewers and are sold as one 72-count box, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eStarbucks Caffè Verona K-Cups: Dark Roast With Roasty Dark Cocoa Notes\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffè Verona blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — a Starbucks dark roast since 1975, known for a well-balanced cup with dark cocoa and caramelized-sugar notes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100 percent Arabica\u003c\/strong\u003e — Latin American and Asia\/Pacific beans roasted dark in the Starbucks style\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e72 K-Cup pods\u003c\/strong\u003e — more than two months of one cup a day\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eKeurig compatible\u003c\/strong\u003e — designed for Keurig K-Cup single-serve brewers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed, single-serve pods\u003c\/strong\u003e — each pod is sealed to keep the ground coffee fresh until brewed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffeinated, unflavored\u003c\/strong\u003e — regular dark roast coffee with no added flavors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInsert one pod into your Keurig brewer, close the handle, and choose your cup size; Starbucks recommends 8 oz (237 mL) for the intended strength and 6 oz for a bolder cup. Caffè Verona pairs well with chocolate desserts and takes milk or cream well. For iced coffee, brew a 6 oz cup over a full glass of ice. Store the box in a cool, dry cupboard away from heat and light and use the pods by the best-by date printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Starbucks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStarbucks opened its first store in Seattle in 1971 and has grown into the largest coffeehouse chain in the world. Caffè Verona was created in 1975 as a dessert coffee and is one of the company's longest-standing blends. Starbucks packaged coffee for home, including these K-Cup pods, is produced and distributed by Nestlé under a global licensing agreement. Find more pantry favorites in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/athome.starbucks.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eathome.starbucks.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Starbucks Caffè Verona K-Cup coffee contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Each pod contains only ground 100 percent Arabica coffee, with no flavorings, sweeteners, or dairy, and no allergens are declared on the box. The coffee is caffeinated. If you have a specific sensitivity, read the printed ingredient statement on the box you receive, since packaging is the final source for any product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Starbucks Caffè Verona K-Cup pods?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one pod in any Keurig K-Cup brewer, close the lid, and select 8 oz (237 mL) for the intended strength or 6 oz for a bolder cup. Do not reuse a pod. Keep unused pods sealed in the box in a dry cupboard away from heat, and brew them before the best-by date stamped on the package.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Caffè Verona taste like compared to Starbucks Pike Place or French Roast?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eCaffè Verona is a dark roast with a rounded, roasty flavor and notes of dark cocoa and caramelized sugar, which is why Starbucks pairs it with chocolate. It is bolder than Pike Place, a medium roast, but smoother and less smoky than French Roast, the darkest Starbucks blend. It suits people who like a rich cup that is not harsh.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow many pods are in the box and what brewers do they fit?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe box contains 72 individually sealed K-Cup pods, enough for more than two months at one cup a day. They are made for Keurig K-Cup single-serve brewers, including the K-Classic, K-Elite, K-Mini, and K-Supreme lines. The pods are sold as one 72-count box on this listing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Starbucks Caffè Verona K-Cup coffee contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Each pod contains only ground 100 percent Arabica coffee, with no flavorings, sweeteners, or dairy, and no allergens are declared on the box. The coffee is caffeinated. If you have a specific sensitivity, read the printed ingredient statement on the box you receive, since packaging is the final source for any product.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew Starbucks Caffè Verona K-Cup pods?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Place one pod in any Keurig K-Cup brewer, close the lid, and select 8 oz (237 mL) for the intended strength or 6 oz for a bolder cup. Do not reuse a pod. Keep unused pods sealed in the box in a dry cupboard away from heat, and brew them before the best-by date stamped on the package.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does Caffè Verona taste like compared to Starbucks Pike Place or French Roast?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Caffè Verona is a dark roast with a rounded, roasty flavor and notes of dark cocoa and caramelized sugar, which is why Starbucks pairs it with chocolate. It is bolder than Pike Place, a medium roast, but smoother and less smoky than French Roast, the darkest Starbucks blend. It suits people who like a rich cup that is not harsh.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How many pods are in the box and what brewers do they fit?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The box contains 72 individually sealed K-Cup pods, enough for more than two months at one cup a day. They are made for Keurig K-Cup single-serve brewers, including the K-Classic, K-Elite, K-Mini, and K-Supreme lines. The pods are sold as one 72-count box on this listing.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Starbucks","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44343814455487,"sku":"STARBUCKS-CAFFEVERONA-KCUP-72CT","price":74.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/Verona1.png?v=1778966479"},{"product_id":"starbucks-sumatra-dark-roast-coffee-k-cups-72-count-single-origin-bold-earthy-keurig-compatible","title":"Starbucks Sumatra Dark Roast Coffee K-Cups – 72 Count | Single-Origin, Bold \u0026 Earthy | Keurig Compatible","description":"\u003cp\u003eStarbucks Sumatra Dark Roast Coffee K-Cup Pods are a 72-count box of single-origin, 100 percent Arabica dark roast coffee with a bold, earthy flavor and low acidity, compatible with all Keurig K-Cup brewers. Shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eStarbucks Sumatra Dark Roast K-Cups: Bold Single-Origin Coffee for Keurig Brewers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSingle-origin Sumatra beans\u003c\/strong\u003e — sourced from the Indonesian island of Sumatra for a distinct regional flavor profile\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDark roast, low acidity\u003c\/strong\u003e — a bold, earthy, full-bodied cup with a smooth, long finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100 percent Arabica coffee\u003c\/strong\u003e — made entirely from Arabica beans rather than a Robusta blend\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e72 K-Cup pods per box\u003c\/strong\u003e — enough pods for several weeks of daily brewing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eKeurig K-Cup compatible\u003c\/strong\u003e — works with all standard Keurig K-Cup brewing systems\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIndividually sealed pods\u003c\/strong\u003e — each pod is sealed to help keep the grounds fresh until brewed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePlace one K-Cup pod into a Keurig-compatible brewer and select your preferred cup size; a smaller cup size yields a stronger, more concentrated brew. Sumatra pairs well as a straight black coffee or with a splash of milk. Store unused pods in the box, away from heat and direct sunlight, until ready to brew.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Starbucks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStarbucks is a globally recognized coffee company known for sourcing beans from specific growing regions and offering a range of single-origin and blended roasts. The Sumatra Dark Roast highlights beans grown on the Indonesian island, roasted to bring out a bold, earthy character. Browse more pantry favorites in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.starbucks.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003estarbucks.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Starbucks Sumatra Dark Roast contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eStarbucks Sumatra Dark Roast K-Cup pods are made from 100 percent Arabica coffee beans. Coffee itself is not a common allergen, but shared manufacturing lines can sometimes introduce trace ingredients. Check the printed packaging or box for the most current allergen and facility information before brewing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store Starbucks Sumatra K-Cup pods?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep the box of K-Cup pods in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, since coffee can absorb nearby smells. There is no need to refrigerate sealed pods. Once the box is opened, keep unused pods in their original packaging to help preserve freshness until brewing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Starbucks Sumatra Dark Roast taste like compared to other Starbucks roasts?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eSumatra is a single-origin dark roast with a bold, earthy, and complex flavor and lower acidity than many other Starbucks roasts. Compared to a medium roast like Pike Place, Sumatra is heavier-bodied and more intense, appealing to drinkers who prefer a strong, full-flavored cup with a smooth, long finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere are Starbucks Sumatra K-Cup pods made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe Sumatra coffee beans are grown on the Indonesian island of Sumatra and roasted and packed into K-Cup pods for the US market. Real Prime Deals ships every 72-count box fast from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same pods sold at major retailers.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Starbucks Sumatra Dark Roast contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Starbucks Sumatra Dark Roast K-Cup pods are made from 100 percent Arabica coffee beans. Coffee itself is not a common allergen, but shared manufacturing lines can sometimes introduce trace ingredients. Check the printed packaging or box for the most current allergen and facility information before brewing.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store Starbucks Sumatra K-Cup pods?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Keep the box of K-Cup pods in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight and strong odors, since coffee can absorb nearby smells. There is no need to refrigerate sealed pods. Once the box is opened, keep unused pods in their original packaging to help preserve freshness until brewing.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does Starbucks Sumatra Dark Roast taste like compared to other Starbucks roasts?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Sumatra is a single-origin dark roast with a bold, earthy, and complex flavor and lower acidity than many other Starbucks roasts. Compared to a medium roast like Pike Place, Sumatra is heavier-bodied and more intense, appealing to drinkers who prefer a strong, full-flavored cup with a smooth, long finish.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where are Starbucks Sumatra K-Cup pods made?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The Sumatra coffee beans are grown on the Indonesian island of Sumatra and roasted and packed into K-Cup pods for the US market. Real Prime Deals ships every 72-count box fast from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same pods sold at major retailers.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Starbucks","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44343823499455,"sku":"STARBUCKS-SUMATRA-KCUP-72CT","price":74.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/sumatra.png?v=1778966496"},{"product_id":"epsa-lemonade-232ml-glass-bottle","title":"EPSA Lemonade, Sparkling Greek Lemon Soda with 7% Real Juice, 7.85 fl oz (232ml) Glass Bottle","description":"\u003cp\u003eEPSA Lemonade is a 7.85 fl oz (232 mL) embossed glass bottle of sparkling Greek lemon soda made with 7 percent real lemon juice and no artificial colors, produced in Greece since 1924. It is available as a single bottle or in packs of 4, 8, and 12, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eEPSA Lemonade: Sparkling Greek Lemon Soda with 7 Percent Real Juice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e7 percent real lemon juice\u003c\/strong\u003e — from concentrated juice, giving a tart, genuine citrus flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo artificial colors\u003c\/strong\u003e — carbonated water, sugar, lemon juice, citric acid, natural flavorings, and a stabilizer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFine carbonation\u003c\/strong\u003e — small, crisp bubbles that soften the tartness\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThree-time Crystal Taste Award winner\u003c\/strong\u003e — recognized by the International Taste Institute in Brussels\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProduct of Greece\u003c\/strong\u003e — bottled by EPSA in Volos in the signature embossed 7.85 fl oz (232 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 4, Pack of 8, and Pack of 12 for parties and the fridge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe ice-cold straight from the bottle, or pour over ice with a wedge of lemon. It mixes well with tequila, gin, or vodka and with a splash of ouzo for a Greek-style spritz, and it pairs with grilled fish and mezze. Store bottles upright in a cool, dark place and refrigerate before serving; once opened, drink within a day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout EPSA\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEPSA, short for Elliniki Paragogi Soft Drinks, was founded in Volos, Greece, in 1924 and is one of the country's oldest soft drink makers, known for its ridged glass bottle and real-juice lemonade and orangeade. The bottles are a fixture of Greek cafes, tavernas, and seaside kiosks. Find more drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e, or learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.epsa.gr\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eepsa.gr\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes EPSA Lemonade contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo major allergens are declared. The ingredients are carbonated water, sugar, 7 percent lemon juice from concentrate, citric acid, natural flavorings, potassium sorbate, locust bean gum, and ascorbic acid, and the drink is suitable for vegetarians and vegans. Anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed label on the bottle before drinking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store EPSA Lemonade?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it very cold, straight from the bottle or over ice with a lemon wedge, the way it is served at Greek cafes. Keep unopened bottles upright in a cool, dark cupboard and chill in the refrigerator before serving. Once opened, the carbonation fades within a day, so finish the bottle the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between EPSA Lemonade and EPSA Orangeade?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eEPSA Lemonade uses 7 percent lemon juice and tastes tart, sharp, and citrus-forward, which makes it the better mixer for tequila and gin. EPSA Orangeade uses 20 percent orange juice, so it is sweeter, rounder, and cloudier. Both come in the same 232 mL embossed glass bottle with the same fine carbonation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs EPSA Lemonade imported from Greece?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. This is the authentic EPSA Lemonade in the original 232 mL embossed glass bottle, produced in Volos, Greece, not a US-market version. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same lemonade served in Greek tavernas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does EPSA Lemonade contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No major allergens are declared. The ingredients are carbonated water, sugar, 7 percent lemon juice from concentrate, citric acid, natural flavorings, potassium sorbate, locust bean gum, and ascorbic acid, and the drink is suitable for vegetarians and vegans. Anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed label on the bottle before drinking.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I serve and store EPSA Lemonade?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Serve it very cold, straight from the bottle or over ice with a lemon wedge, the way it is served at Greek cafes. Keep unopened bottles upright in a cool, dark cupboard and chill in the refrigerator before serving. Once opened, the carbonation fades within a day, so finish the bottle the same day.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between EPSA Lemonade and EPSA Orangeade?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"EPSA Lemonade uses 7 percent lemon juice and tastes tart, sharp, and citrus-forward, which makes it the better mixer for tequila and gin. EPSA Orangeade uses 20 percent orange juice, so it is sweeter, rounder, and cloudier. Both come in the same 232 mL embossed glass bottle with the same fine carbonation.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is EPSA Lemonade imported from Greece?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. This is the authentic EPSA Lemonade in the original 232 mL embossed glass bottle, produced in Volos, Greece, not a US-market version. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same lemonade served in Greek tavernas.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Epsa","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45610399531199,"sku":"EPSA-LEMONADE-232ML-SINGLE","price":4.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 4","offer_id":45725617881279,"sku":"EPSA-LEMONADE-232ML-PACK4","price":16.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 8","offer_id":45725617914047,"sku":"EPSA-LEMONADE-232ML-PACK8","price":31.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":45725617946815,"sku":"EPSA-LEMONADE-232ML-PACK12","price":46.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/image_5368c864-90a1-4d82-a0c5-ef9e51706499.png?v=1781804987"},{"product_id":"epsa-orangeade-232ml-glass-bottle","title":"EPSA Orangeade Sparkling Greek Orange Soda, 232ml","description":"\u003cp\u003eEPSA Orangeade is a 7.85 fl oz (232 mL) embossed glass bottle of sparkling Greek orange soda made with 20 percent real orange juice and no artificial colors, produced in Greece since 1924. It is available as a single bottle or in packs of 4, 8, and 12, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eEPSA Orangeade: Sparkling Greek Orange Soda with 20 Percent Real Juice\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e20 percent real orange juice\u003c\/strong\u003e — from concentrated juice, far more than most orange sodas\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo artificial colors\u003c\/strong\u003e — the cloudy orange color comes from the juice itself\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFine carbonation\u003c\/strong\u003e — gentle bubbles that keep the orange flavor soft and rounded\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVegetarian and vegan\u003c\/strong\u003e — carbonated water, orange juice, sugar, citric acid, natural flavorings, and a stabilizer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProduct of Greece\u003c\/strong\u003e — bottled by EPSA in Volos in the signature embossed 7.85 fl oz (232 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 4, Pack of 8, and Pack of 12 for parties and the fridge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe ice-cold straight from the bottle, or pour over ice with an orange slice. It makes a Greek-style spritz with Aperol or a vodka soda with real fruit flavor, and it pairs with grilled meat, souvlaki, and mezze. Store bottles upright in a cool, dark place and refrigerate before serving; once opened, drink within a day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout EPSA\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eEPSA, short for Elliniki Paragogi Soft Drinks, was founded in Volos, Greece, in 1924 and is one of the country's oldest soft drink makers, known for its ridged glass bottle and real-juice lemonade and orangeade. The bottles are a fixture of Greek cafes, tavernas, and seaside kiosks. Find more drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e, or learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.epsa.gr\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eepsa.gr\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes EPSA Orangeade contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo major allergens are declared. The ingredients are carbonated water, 20 percent orange juice from concentrate, sugar, citric acid, natural flavorings, potassium sorbate, locust bean gum, and ascorbic acid, and the drink is suitable for vegetarians and vegans. Anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed label on the bottle before drinking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store EPSA Orangeade?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it very cold, straight from the bottle or over ice with an orange slice, the way it is served at Greek cafes. Keep unopened bottles upright in a cool, dark cupboard and chill in the refrigerator before serving. Once opened, the carbonation fades within a day, so finish the bottle the same day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between EPSA Orangeade and EPSA Lemonade?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eEPSA Orangeade uses 20 percent orange juice, so it is sweeter, rounder, and naturally cloudy, closer to a sparkling juice than a typical orange soda. EPSA Lemonade uses 7 percent lemon juice and is sharper and more tart. Both come in the same 232 mL embossed glass bottle with fine carbonation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs EPSA Orangeade imported from Greece?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. This is the authentic EPSA Orangeade in the original 232 mL embossed glass bottle, produced in Volos, Greece, not a US-market version. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same orangeade served in Greek tavernas.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does EPSA Orangeade contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No major allergens are declared. The ingredients are carbonated water, 20 percent orange juice from concentrate, sugar, citric acid, natural flavorings, potassium sorbate, locust bean gum, and ascorbic acid, and the drink is suitable for vegetarians and vegans. Anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed label on the bottle before drinking.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I serve and store EPSA Orangeade?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Serve it very cold, straight from the bottle or over ice with an orange slice, the way it is served at Greek cafes. Keep unopened bottles upright in a cool, dark cupboard and chill in the refrigerator before serving. Once opened, the carbonation fades within a day, so finish the bottle the same day.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between EPSA Orangeade and EPSA Lemonade?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"EPSA Orangeade uses 20 percent orange juice, so it is sweeter, rounder, and naturally cloudy, closer to a sparkling juice than a typical orange soda. EPSA Lemonade uses 7 percent lemon juice and is sharper and more tart. Both come in the same 232 mL embossed glass bottle with fine carbonation.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is EPSA Orangeade imported from Greece?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. This is the authentic EPSA Orangeade in the original 232 mL embossed glass bottle, produced in Volos, Greece, not a US-market version. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same orangeade served in Greek tavernas.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Epsa","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45610371645631,"sku":"EPSA-ORANGEADE-232ML-SINGLE","price":4.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 4","offer_id":45610371678399,"sku":"EPSA-ORANGEADE-232ML-PACK4","price":16.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 8","offer_id":45610371711167,"sku":"EPSA-ORANGEADE-232ML-PACK8","price":31.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":45610371743935,"sku":"EPSA-ORANGEADE-232ML-PACK12","price":46.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/image_3e02ddb7-a98d-4eb3-96e6-01c7d23292da.png?v=1781804984"},{"product_id":"orangina-sparkling-citrus-juice-8-5oz","title":"Orangina Sparkling Citrus Juice, Original French Recipe, 8.5 oz","description":"\u003cp\u003eOrangina Sparkling Citrus Juice is an 8.5 fl oz (250 mL) glass bottle of the original French recipe: a lightly carbonated drink made with a blend of orange, lemon, mandarin, and grapefruit juices and real fruit pulp, with no artificial ingredients, preservatives, or high fructose corn syrup. It is available as a single bottle or in packs of 6 and 12, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eOrangina Sparkling Citrus Juice: Original French Recipe in the Round Glass Bottle\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReal citrus juice blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — orange, lemon, mandarin, and grapefruit juices give it a rounder taste than orange soda\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNatural fruit pulp\u003c\/strong\u003e — fine pulp settles in the bottle, which is why the label says to shake gently before opening\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLightly sparkling\u003c\/strong\u003e — gentler carbonation than a typical soda, closer to a sparkling juice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo artificial ingredients\u003c\/strong\u003e — no artificial colors or flavors, no preservatives, and no high fructose corn syrup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOriginal French recipe since 1936\u003c\/strong\u003e — the same citrus drink that has been sold across France and Europe for decades\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e8.5 fl oz (250 mL) glass bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — the classic round bottle, sold as a Single or in packs of 6 and 12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChill the bottle, then turn it upside down once or twice or shake gently to mix the pulp back into the drink before opening. Serve it cold on its own or over ice with a slice of orange. It works as a brunch drink, a lighter alternative to soda with lunch, and a mixer: top it with gin or vodka and a squeeze of lemon for a simple citrus spritz. Store unopened bottles at room temperature or in the fridge, away from sunlight. Once opened, drink it the same day, since the carbonation fades quickly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Orangina\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOrangina was created in the 1930s from a recipe by a Spanish pharmacist and launched in France in 1936, where its pear-shaped, pebbled glass bottle became a familiar sight in cafes. The brand is now part of Suntory Beverage \u0026amp; Food Europe and is sold across France, Europe, and North America. The drink is defined by its blend of citrus juices, light carbonation, and visible pulp. Browse more sodas and juices in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.orangina.eu\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eorangina.eu\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Orangina contain real juice or artificial ingredients?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eOrangina is made with a blend of real citrus juices, mainly orange with lemon, mandarin, and grapefruit, plus natural fruit pulp, carbonated water, and sugar. It contains no artificial colors or flavors, no preservatives, and no high fructose corn syrup. It is not a juice-only drink, so read the printed label for the exact juice percentage and ingredients.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store and serve Orangina?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep unopened bottles at room temperature or chilled, out of direct sunlight, and use them by the date on the label. Serve cold, and gently turn or shake the bottle before opening so the pulp mixes back into the drink. Once opened, finish the bottle the same day because the light carbonation fades faster than in a heavier soda.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Orangina and orange soda?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eOrange soda is usually flavored, brightly colored, and strongly carbonated. Orangina is made from a blend of orange, lemon, mandarin, and grapefruit juices with real pulp and only light carbonation, so it tastes more like fruit and less sweet, with a slightly cloudy look. The pulp is also why you shake the bottle first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Orangina imported from Europe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. This 8.5 fl oz (250 mL) glass bottle is the original French recipe made in Europe, not a reformulated North American version, and it carries the classic round Orangina bottle design. Real Prime Deals imports it and offers it as a Single or in packs of 6 and 12, so you can keep a case chilled.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Orangina contain real juice or artificial ingredients?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Orangina is made with a blend of real citrus juices, mainly orange with lemon, mandarin, and grapefruit, plus natural fruit pulp, carbonated water, and sugar. It contains no artificial colors or flavors, no preservatives, and no high fructose corn syrup. It is not a juice-only drink, so read the printed label for the exact juice percentage and ingredients.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store and serve Orangina?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Keep unopened bottles at room temperature or chilled, out of direct sunlight, and use them by the date on the label. Serve cold, and gently turn or shake the bottle before opening so the pulp mixes back into the drink. Once opened, finish the bottle the same day because the light carbonation fades faster than in a heavier soda.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Orangina and orange soda?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Orange soda is usually flavored, brightly colored, and strongly carbonated. Orangina is made from a blend of orange, lemon, mandarin, and grapefruit juices with real pulp and only light carbonation, so it tastes more like fruit and less sweet, with a slightly cloudy look. The pulp is also why you shake the bottle first.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Orangina imported from Europe?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. This 8.5 fl oz (250 mL) glass bottle is the original French recipe made in Europe, not a reformulated North American version, and it carries the classic round Orangina bottle design. Real Prime Deals imports it and offers it as a Single or in packs of 6 and 12, so you can keep a case chilled.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Orangina","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45599369822399,"sku":"ORANGINA-GLASS-85OZ-SINGLE","price":4.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45599369855167,"sku":"ORANGINA-GLASS-85OZ-PACK6","price":26.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":45599369887935,"sku":"ORANGINA-GLASS-85OZ-PACK12","price":49.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/orangina-1.png?v=1778966556"},{"product_id":"mezzo-mix-6-pack-0-33l-cans-german-cola-and-orange-soda-blend-refreshing-citrus-soft-drink-imported-coca-cola-brand-beverage","title":"Mezzo Mix 11.15 fl oz Cans (330ml) – German Cola Orange Soda – Imported from Germany","description":"\u003cp\u003eMezzo Mix Cola Orange Soda is an 11.15 fl oz (330 mL) German can of Coca-Cola's cola-orange soft drink, blending a cola base with orange soda for a lighter, citrus-forward twist on classic cola. It is the genuine imported can, available as a single or in packs of 3, 6, and 12, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMezzo Mix: Germany's Cola-Orange Soda in the 330 mL Can\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCola-orange blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — a Coca-Cola cola base mixed with orange soda for a lighter, citrus-forward flavor than plain cola\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e11.15 fl oz (330 mL) can\u003c\/strong\u003e — the standard German single-serve can format\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCrisp carbonation\u003c\/strong\u003e — brisk, balanced fizz that carries the citrus note through the cola base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eGerman market recipe\u003c\/strong\u003e — the formula sold across Germany under the Coca-Cola brand, not a US product\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCoca-Cola brand\u003c\/strong\u003e — produced under license by The Coca-Cola Company's German bottling network\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6, and Pack of 12 for trying it once or stocking the fridge\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe Mezzo Mix well chilled, straight from the can or poured over ice with a slice of orange. It works as a mixer with vodka or light rum for a citrus-cola cocktail, or on its own alongside pizza, burgers, and grilled food. Store unopened cans at room temperature away from sunlight and heat; refrigerate before serving and finish an opened can within a day for the best fizz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Mezzo Mix\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMezzo Mix was launched by The Coca-Cola Company in Germany in the 1970s as a cola-orange alternative to standard cola, and it has stayed a German soft-drink staple ever since. The can is produced and sold specifically for the German market rather than distributed through US retail channels. Browse more imported soft drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.coca-cola.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ecoca-cola.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Mezzo Mix contain caffeine or allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMezzo Mix is a cola-orange soda made with carbonated water, sugar, cola flavoring, and orange flavoring, and it does contain caffeine as part of its cola base. The European label does not declare common food allergens, but because recipes and labeling can vary by production run, read the printed ingredient list on the can you receive before drinking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store and serve Mezzo Mix?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe the can well chilled, straight from the fridge or poured over ice. Keep unopened cans at room temperature, away from direct sunlight and heat sources such as a stove or hot car. Once opened, drink within a day for the best carbonation, since resealing a can does not fully preserve the fizz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Mezzo Mix taste like compared to regular cola?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMezzo Mix blends a standard cola base with orange soda, so it tastes lighter and more citrus-forward than a plain cola while keeping the familiar cola backbone. It is less sweet and less orange-forward than an American orange soda, sitting closer to a cola with a bright citrus lift than a true orange drink.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Mezzo Mix imported from Europe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. This is the genuine German-market Mezzo Mix in the 11.15 fl oz (330 mL) can, a Coca-Cola brand sold across Germany and not distributed in US grocery stores. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same recipe sold in Germany.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Mezzo Mix contain caffeine or allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mezzo Mix is a cola-orange soda made with carbonated water, sugar, cola flavoring, and orange flavoring, and it does contain caffeine as part of its cola base. The European label does not declare common food allergens, but because recipes and labeling can vary by production run, read the printed ingredient list on the can you receive before drinking.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store and serve Mezzo Mix?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Serve the can well chilled, straight from the fridge or poured over ice. Keep unopened cans at room temperature, away from direct sunlight and heat sources such as a stove or hot car. Once opened, drink within a day for the best carbonation, since resealing a can does not fully preserve the fizz.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does Mezzo Mix taste like compared to regular cola?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Mezzo Mix blends a standard cola base with orange soda, so it tastes lighter and more citrus-forward than a plain cola while keeping the familiar cola backbone. It is less sweet and less orange-forward than an American orange soda, sitting closer to a cola with a bright citrus lift than a true orange drink.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Mezzo Mix imported from Europe?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. This is the genuine German-market Mezzo Mix in the 11.15 fl oz (330 mL) can, a Coca-Cola brand sold across Germany and not distributed in US grocery stores. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same recipe sold in Germany.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Mezzo Mix","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":44352930807999,"sku":"MEZZO-MIX-ORANGE-COLA-330ML-SINGLE","price":3.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45906749358271,"sku":"MEZZO-MIX-ORANGE-COLA-330ML-PACK3","price":9.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45906749391039,"sku":"MEZZO-MIX-ORANGE-COLA-330ML-PACK6","price":17.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":45906749423807,"sku":"MEZZO-MIX-ORANGE-COLA-330ML-PACK12","price":33.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/mzzmx.jpg?v=1784844836"},{"product_id":"paulaner-spezi-orange-cola-330ml","title":"Paulaner Spezi Orange Cola Soda, 11.15 fl oz (330ml) Can — Since 1974, Germany","description":"\u003cp\u003ePaulaner Spezi is an 11.15 fl oz (330 mL) can of Germany's original orange-cola soda, a non-alcoholic, caffeinated blend of orange lemonade and cola made with real orange and lemon juice concentrate and cane sugar, produced under license in Munich with the same taste and retro design since 1974. It is the genuine German import, available as a single can or in packs of 3, 6, and 12, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePaulaner Spezi: Germany's Original Orange-Cola Soda in a 330 mL Can\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOrange-cola blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — cola and orange lemonade in one drink, citrusy and slightly tart up front with a cola finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReal fruit juice from concentrate\u003c\/strong\u003e — orange juice and lemon juice from concentrate, plus caffeine and natural flavors, per the ingredient list\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSweetened with sugar, no artificial sweeteners\u003c\/strong\u003e — 130 calories and 32 g sugar per 330 mL can, per the nutrition panel\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNon-alcoholic and caffeinated\u003c\/strong\u003e — a soft drink, not a beer, despite the Paulaner name; contains caffeine like a standard cola\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSame recipe and design since 1974\u003c\/strong\u003e — bottled under license in Munich, Germany, with the unchanged retro wave can\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, Pack of 6, and Pack of 12 for parties, beer-garden nights at home, and stocking up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe ice cold straight from the can or poured over ice in a tall glass; a slice of orange or lemon is traditional in Bavarian beer gardens. It pairs naturally with pretzels, bratwurst, schnitzel, and grilled food, and it works as a mixer in place of plain cola. Store unopened cans in a cool, dark place away from heat and sunlight, and refrigerate before serving. Once opened, drink the same day, since the carbonation and citrus fade quickly. Check the best-by date printed on the bottom of the can.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Paulaner\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePaulaner is a Munich brewery founded in 1634 by Paulaner monks and best known worldwide for its wheat beer and Oktoberfest presence. Since 1974 the company has also produced Spezi, the orange-cola soft drink that originated in Bavaria in the 1950s and became a cult favorite across Germany. Paulaner Spezi is a non-alcoholic soft drink, sold in cans and bottles in German supermarkets, beer gardens, and cafes. Browse more imported sodas and drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.paulaner.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003epaulaner.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Paulaner Spezi contain allergens or alcohol?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePaulaner Spezi is a non-alcoholic soft drink. Its ingredient list is water, sugar, orange and lemon juice from concentrate, carbonated water, caramel color, phosphoric and citric acid, sodium citrate, natural flavors, caffeine, ascorbic acid, and locust bean gum, with no milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or egg listed. Read the printed label on the can for the current ingredient statement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Paulaner Spezi?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it ice cold, straight from the can or over ice in a tall glass with a slice of orange. Store unopened cans in a cool, dark place away from heat and sunlight and chill before serving. Drink an opened can the same day, since the fizz and citrus fade, and check the best-by date on the can.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Spezi and a regular cola or orange soda?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eSpezi is a distinct German category that blends cola with orange lemonade, so it tastes citrusy and lightly tart first, then finishes like a cola. It is made with real orange and lemon juice from concentrate and is less sweet than a typical orange soda. Paulaner Spezi is caffeinated like a cola and has kept the same recipe since 1974.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Paulaner Spezi imported from Europe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. Paulaner Spezi is produced under license by Paulaner in Munich, Germany, and this is the original 11.15 fl oz (330 mL) German can, not a US-made version. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same drink sold in German supermarkets and beer gardens.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Paulaner Spezi contain allergens or alcohol?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Paulaner Spezi is a non-alcoholic soft drink. Its ingredient list is water, sugar, orange and lemon juice from concentrate, carbonated water, caramel color, phosphoric and citric acid, sodium citrate, natural flavors, caffeine, ascorbic acid, and locust bean gum, with no milk, nuts, soy, wheat, or egg listed. Read the printed label on the can for the current ingredient statement.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I serve and store Paulaner Spezi?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Serve it ice cold, straight from the can or over ice in a tall glass with a slice of orange. Store unopened cans in a cool, dark place away from heat and sunlight and chill before serving. Drink an opened can the same day, since the fizz and citrus fade, and check the best-by date on the can.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Spezi and a regular cola or orange soda?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Spezi is a distinct German category that blends cola with orange lemonade, so it tastes citrusy and lightly tart first, then finishes like a cola. It is made with real orange and lemon juice from concentrate and is less sweet than a typical orange soda. Paulaner Spezi is caffeinated like a cola and has kept the same recipe since 1974.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Paulaner Spezi imported from Europe?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. Paulaner Spezi is produced under license by Paulaner in Munich, Germany, and this is the original 11.15 fl oz (330 mL) German can, not a US-made version. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same drink sold in German supermarkets and beer gardens.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Paulaner","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45715342885055,"sku":"PAULANER-SPEZI-330ML-SINGLE","price":4.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45715342917823,"sku":"PAULANER-SPEZI-330ML-PK3","price":13.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45715342950591,"sku":"PAULANER-SPEZI-330ML-PK6","price":25.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 12","offer_id":45715342983359,"sku":"PAULANER-SPEZI-330ML-PK12","price":49.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/image_c3e8a669-5d72-46f5-b32d-3edeea09f41e.png?v=1781214119"},{"product_id":"almdudler-original-austrian-herbal-soda-500ml","title":"Almdudler Original Austrian Herbal Soda, 16.9 fl oz Bottle (500ml)","description":"\u003cp\u003eAlmdudler Original Austrian Herbal Soda is a 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle of lightly carbonated herbal lemonade made with a blend of alpine herbs, known in Austria as the national soft drink since 1957. It is the genuine imported bottle, available as a single or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eAlmdudler Original: Austrian Alpine Herbal Soda in the 16.9 fl oz Bottle\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAlpine herb flavor\u003c\/strong\u003e — a mildly sweet, slightly tangy herbal lemonade flavored with a blend of mountain herbs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLightly carbonated\u003c\/strong\u003e — a gentle sparkle that lets the herbal flavor come through\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16.9 fl oz (500 mL) bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — a single-serve size, the same format sold in Austrian shops\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAustrian original since 1957\u003c\/strong\u003e — the recipe created by Erwin Klein in Vienna and still made by the Klein family company\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eImported from Austria\u003c\/strong\u003e — the same bottle sold across Austria, Germany, and Switzerland\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for trying it once or keeping the fridge stocked\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe Almdudler well chilled, straight from the bottle or poured over ice with a slice of lemon. For the classic Austrian Almdudler Spritzer, mix it half and half with dry white wine. For a lighter drink, top it up with sparkling water, or use it as a mixer with gin, vodka, or elderflower liqueur. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight; once opened, keep the bottle capped in the refrigerator and finish it within a day or two while it is still fizzy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Almdudler\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAlmdudler was created in 1957 in Vienna by Erwin Klein, who is said to have given the first bottle to his wife as a wedding gift. The name combines Alm, the alpine meadow, and dudeln, an Austrian word for yodeling. The company is still family owned and Almdudler is one of the best-selling soft drinks in Austria, exported to many countries. Browse more imported drinks in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.almdudler.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ealmdudler.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Almdudler Original contain allergens or caffeine?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eAlmdudler Original is a caffeine-free herbal lemonade made from water, sugar, carbon dioxide, acid, and natural herb flavoring, with no common food allergens declared on the Austrian label. Because it is an imported product and recipes can be updated, anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed ingredient list on the bottle before drinking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Almdudler?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it cold, straight from the bottle or over ice with a lemon slice. Austrians also mix it half and half with dry white wine as an Almdudler Spritzer, or top it with sparkling water. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from sunlight. After opening, cap it and refrigerate for a day or two.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Almdudler taste like?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eAlmdudler tastes like a mildly sweet herbal lemonade with a light sparkle. It is less sweet than most American sodas and has a fresh, slightly tangy finish from the blend of alpine herbs, which some people compare to a gentler ginger ale with a floral, meadow-like note. It is a favorite with schnitzel and alpine dishes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Almdudler imported from Europe?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. This is the original Almdudler bottled in Austria, the same 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) format sold in Austrian supermarkets and mountain huts. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same recipe Austrians have been drinking since 1957.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Almdudler Original contain allergens or caffeine?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Almdudler Original is a caffeine-free herbal lemonade made from water, sugar, carbon dioxide, acid, and natural herb flavoring, with no common food allergens declared on the Austrian label. Because it is an imported product and recipes can be updated, anyone with a specific sensitivity should read the printed ingredient list on the bottle before drinking.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I serve and store Almdudler?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Serve it cold, straight from the bottle or over ice with a lemon slice. Austrians also mix it half and half with dry white wine as an Almdudler Spritzer, or top it with sparkling water. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from sunlight. After opening, cap it and refrigerate for a day or two.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does Almdudler taste like?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Almdudler tastes like a mildly sweet herbal lemonade with a light sparkle. It is less sweet than most American sodas and has a fresh, slightly tangy finish from the blend of alpine herbs, which some people compare to a gentler ginger ale with a floral, meadow-like note. It is a favorite with schnitzel and alpine dishes.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Almdudler imported from Europe?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. This is the original Almdudler bottled in Austria, the same 16.9 fl oz (500 mL) format sold in Austrian supermarkets and mountain huts. Real Prime Deals imports it and ships every order from our New Jersey warehouse, so US and Canadian customers receive the same recipe Austrians have been drinking since 1957.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Almdudler","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45621361672383,"sku":"ALMDUDLER-ORIG-500ML-SINGLE","price":5.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45621361705151,"sku":"ALMDUDLER-ORIG-500ML-PACK3","price":16.49,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45621361737919,"sku":"ALMDUDLER-ORIG-500ML-PACK6","price":30.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/image_ef8ebfb8-ce3f-4055-b236-a4749a663ad0.png?v=1778970576"},{"product_id":"elmhurst-milked-pistachios-unsweetened-32oz","title":"Elmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened, Only 3 Ingredients, Dairy Free, Non GMO, 32 fl oz (946ml)","description":"\u003cp\u003eElmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened is a 32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton of pistachio milk made from only three ingredients: filtered water, pistachios, and Himalayan pink salt. It has no added sugar, oils, or gums and provides 3 g of plant protein per serving. Available as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eElmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened: Three-Ingredient Pistachio Milk\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOnly 3 ingredients\u003c\/strong\u003e — filtered water, pistachios, and Himalayan pink salt; no gums, oils, or emulsifiers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo added sugar\u003c\/strong\u003e — 1 g naturally occurring sugar and 80 calories per 8 fl oz serving\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e3 g plant protein per serving\u003c\/strong\u003e — from whole pistachios, with biotin at 20 percent, vitamin B6 at 15 percent, and thiamin at 10 percent of the daily value\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDairy-free, vegan, gluten-free, kosher, non-GMO\u003c\/strong\u003e — a smooth, pale green plant milk with a mild nutty flavor\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton\u003c\/strong\u003e — four 8 fl oz servings per carton\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for stocking the pantry\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShake well and pour into espresso for a pistachio latte, over cereal, or into smoothies with banana or berries. Its neutral, slightly savory profile also works in soups, pasta sauces, and baking where you want body without sweetness. Store the unopened carton in a cool, dry pantry; refrigerate after opening and use within 7 to 10 days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Elmhurst\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElmhurst 1925 started as a family-run dairy in New York in 1925 and, after nearly a century of bottling cow's milk, switched entirely to plant-based milks in 2017. Its patented HydroRelease method turns whole nuts and grains into a creamy milk without added gums, oils, or emulsifiers, which is why most cartons list only two to four ingredients. Products are made for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection or see the full \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/elmhurst-plant-based-milk\"\u003eElmhurst plant-based milk range\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.elmhurst1925.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eelmhurst1925.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Elmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. It contains pistachios, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, gluten, or oat ingredients and is labeled gluten-free and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current allergen and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Elmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the pistachio solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Milked Pistachios and Vanilla Milked Pistachios?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBoth share the same pistachio base, 32 fl oz carton, 80 calories, and 3 g protein per serving, and both are unsweetened. The plain version has just water, pistachios, and salt, so it is neutral enough for savory cooking. The Vanilla version adds real vanilla extract for lattes and breakfast bowls.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Elmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eElmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Elmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. It contains pistachios, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, gluten, or oat ingredients and is labeled gluten-free and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current allergen and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Elmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the pistachio solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Milked Pistachios and Vanilla Milked Pistachios?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Both share the same pistachio base, 32 fl oz carton, 80 calories, and 3 g protein per serving, and both are unsweetened. The plain version has just water, pistachios, and salt, so it is neutral enough for savory cooking. The Vanilla version adds real vanilla extract for lattes and breakfast bowls.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Elmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Elmhurst Milked Pistachios Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Elmhurst","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45743199092927,"sku":"ELMHURST-PISTACHIO-UNSWT-32OZ-SINGLE","price":9.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45743199125695,"sku":"ELMHURST-PISTACHIO-UNSWT-32OZ-PK3","price":27.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45743199158463,"sku":"ELMHURST-PISTACHIO-UNSWT-32OZ-PK6","price":51.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/pis1.png?v=1778966848"},{"product_id":"elmhurst-milked-almonds-unsweetened-32oz","title":"Elmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened, Only 2 Ingredients, 4x More Almonds, Dairy Free, Non GMO, 32 fl oz (946ml)","description":"\u003cp\u003eElmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened is a 32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton of almond milk made from only two ingredients: filtered water and almonds. It uses up to four times more almonds per serving than leading brands, giving 5 g of plant protein with no added sugar, gums, or oils. Available as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eElmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened: Two-Ingredient Almond Milk with 5 g Protein\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOnly 2 ingredients\u003c\/strong\u003e — filtered water and almonds; no gums, oils, emulsifiers, or carrageenan\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUp to 4x more almonds\u003c\/strong\u003e — more nuts per serving than typical almond milks, which is where the 5 g of protein comes from\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo added sugar\u003c\/strong\u003e — 0 g added sugar; the richness comes from the almonds, not sweeteners\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDairy-free, vegan, gluten-free, kosher, non-GMO\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean, mild almond flavor that suits cereal, coffee, and cooking\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton\u003c\/strong\u003e — four 8 fl oz servings per recyclable carton\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for stocking the pantry\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShake the carton well and pour over cereal or granola, blend into smoothies, or use as a one-to-one milk replacement in pancakes, muffins, and cream soups. It works in hot coffee and tea; for a foamed latte, heat it gently and froth. Store the unopened carton in a cool, dry pantry; refrigerate after opening and use within 7 to 10 days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Elmhurst\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElmhurst 1925 started as a family-run dairy in New York in 1925 and, after nearly a century of bottling cow's milk, switched entirely to plant-based milks in 2017. Its patented HydroRelease method turns whole nuts and grains into a creamy milk without added gums, oils, or emulsifiers, which is why most cartons list only two to four ingredients. Products are made for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection or see the full \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/elmhurst-plant-based-milk\"\u003eElmhurst plant-based milk range\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.elmhurst1925.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eelmhurst1925.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Elmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. It contains almonds, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, gluten, or oat ingredients and is labeled gluten-free and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current allergen and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Elmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the almond solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow is Elmhurst almond milk different from regular almond milk?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eTypical almond milks contain about two percent almonds plus water, sunflower oil, gellan gum, and added vitamins, and deliver around 1 g of protein. Elmhurst uses only water and almonds at a higher nut concentration, so a serving has 5 g of protein and a creamier body without any gums or oils.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Elmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eElmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Elmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. It contains almonds, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, gluten, or oat ingredients and is labeled gluten-free and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current allergen and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Elmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the almond solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How is Elmhurst almond milk different from regular almond milk?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Typical almond milks contain about two percent almonds plus water, sunflower oil, gellan gum, and added vitamins, and deliver around 1 g of protein. Elmhurst uses only water and almonds at a higher nut concentration, so a serving has 5 g of protein and a creamier body without any gums or oils.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Elmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Elmhurst Milked Almonds Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Elmhurst","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45524489765055,"sku":"ELMHURST-ALMOND-UNSWT-32OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45743724069055,"sku":"ELMHURST-ALMOND-UNSWT-32OZ-PACK3","price":19.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45743724101823,"sku":"ELMHURST-ALMOND-UNSWT-32OZ-PACK6","price":31.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/Elmunalmmilk.webp?v=1781805063"},{"product_id":"elmhurst-milked-oats-unsweetened-32oz","title":"Elmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened, Only 3 Ingredients, 25g Whole Grain\/Serving, Dairy Free, Non GMO, 32 fl oz (946ml)","description":"\u003cp\u003eElmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened is a 32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton of oat milk made from only three ingredients: filtered water, whole grain oats, and salt. It has no added sugar, gums, or oils and delivers 25 g of whole grain per serving. Available as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eElmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened: Three-Ingredient Whole Grain Oat Milk\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOnly 3 ingredients\u003c\/strong\u003e — filtered water, whole grain oats, and salt; no gums, oils, emulsifiers, or carrageenan\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e25 g whole grain per serving\u003c\/strong\u003e — about half the recommended daily whole grain intake in one 8 fl oz glass, with 3 g plant protein\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo added sugar\u003c\/strong\u003e — the 1 g of sugar per serving occurs naturally in the oats; 100 calories per 8 fl oz serving\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDairy-free, vegan, non-GMO\u003c\/strong\u003e — a plant-based milk with a mild, naturally sweet oat flavor that works hot or cold\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton\u003c\/strong\u003e — four servings per carton in a recyclable FSC-certified carton\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for stocking the pantry\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShake the carton well, then pour over cereal, blend into smoothies, or stir into oatmeal and pancake batter. It works in hot coffee and tea and is a common choice for oat lattes, though it is not a dedicated barista blend, so foam is lighter than with the Elmhurst barista creamers. Store the unopened carton in a cool, dry pantry; after opening, refrigerate and use within 7 to 10 days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Elmhurst\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElmhurst 1925 started as a family-run dairy in New York in 1925 and, after nearly a century of bottling cow's milk, switched entirely to plant-based milks in 2017. Its patented HydroRelease method turns whole nuts and grains into a creamy milk without added gums, oils, or emulsifiers, which is why most cartons list only two to four ingredients. Products are made for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection or see the full \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/elmhurst-plant-based-milk\"\u003eElmhurst plant-based milk range\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.elmhurst1925.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eelmhurst1925.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Elmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt contains oats, which are a gluten-containing grain in the United States unless certified gluten-free, and this product is not certified gluten-free, so it is not suitable for celiac disease or gluten sensitivity. It contains no dairy, nuts, or soy ingredients. Read the printed label for the current facility statement before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Elmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the oats in suspension and natural separation is normal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Elmhurst Milked Oats and other oat milks?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMost oat milks list eight or more ingredients, including rapeseed or sunflower oil, gellan gum, and added vitamins. Elmhurst Milked Oats uses only water, whole grain oats, and salt, so the texture comes from the oats themselves. It has more whole grain per serving and a cleaner, less oily mouthfeel.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Elmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eElmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Elmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"It contains oats, which are a gluten-containing grain in the United States unless certified gluten-free, and this product is not certified gluten-free, so it is not suitable for celiac disease or gluten sensitivity. It contains no dairy, nuts, or soy ingredients. Read the printed label for the current facility statement before use.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Elmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the oats in suspension and natural separation is normal.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Elmhurst Milked Oats and other oat milks?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Most oat milks list eight or more ingredients, including rapeseed or sunflower oil, gellan gum, and added vitamins. Elmhurst Milked Oats uses only water, whole grain oats, and salt, so the texture comes from the oats themselves. It has more whole grain per serving and a cleaner, less oily mouthfeel.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Elmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Elmhurst Milked Oats Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Elmhurst","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45524541997247,"sku":"ELMHURST-OATS-UNSWT-32OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45743721021631,"sku":"ELMHURST-OATS-UNSWT-32OZ-PACK3","price":19.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45743721054399,"sku":"ELMHURST-OATS-UNSWT-32OZ-PACK6","price":31.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/oatn.png?v=1779549143"},{"product_id":"elmhurst-milked-walnuts-unsweetened-32oz","title":"Elmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened, Only 2 Ingredients, Dairy Free, Non GMO, 32 fl oz (946ml)","description":"\u003cp\u003eElmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened is a 32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton of walnut milk made from only two ingredients: filtered water and walnuts. It has no added sugar, gums, or oils, and each serving provides 1400 mg of omega-3 ALA from the walnuts themselves. Available as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eElmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened: Two-Ingredient Walnut Milk Rich in Omega-3 ALA\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOnly 2 ingredients\u003c\/strong\u003e — filtered water and walnuts; no gums, oils, emulsifiers, or carrageenan\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOmega-3 ALA from walnuts\u003c\/strong\u003e — 1400 mg of ALA per 8 fl oz serving, about 87 percent of the daily value, plus 3 g plant protein\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo added sugar\u003c\/strong\u003e — 0 g sugar and 120 calories per 8 fl oz serving; the richness comes from walnut fat, not sweeteners\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDairy-free, vegan, gluten-free, kosher\u003c\/strong\u003e — a mild, nutty plant-based milk with an earthy walnut finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton\u003c\/strong\u003e — four servings per carton in a recyclable FSC-certified carton\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for stocking the pantry\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShake well and pour into dark roast coffee, overnight oats, or a banana smoothie, where the walnut flavor pairs well with cocoa, cinnamon, and maple. It also works as the liquid in muffin and pancake batter. Store the unopened carton in a cool, dry pantry; after opening, refrigerate and use within 7 to 10 days, shaking before each pour.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Elmhurst\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElmhurst 1925 started as a family-run dairy in New York in 1925 and, after nearly a century of bottling cow's milk, switched entirely to plant-based milks in 2017. Its patented HydroRelease method turns whole nuts and grains into a creamy milk without added gums, oils, or emulsifiers, which is why most cartons list only two to four ingredients. Products are made for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection or see the full \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/elmhurst-plant-based-milk\"\u003eElmhurst plant-based milk range\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.elmhurst1925.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eelmhurst1925.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Elmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. It contains walnuts, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, gluten, or oat ingredients and is labeled gluten-free and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current allergen and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Elmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the walnut solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Elmhurst walnut milk taste like compared to almond milk?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eWalnut milk is richer and a little earthier than almond milk, with a soft, buttery body from the walnut fat and a mild, slightly toasty finish. Elmhurst Milked Almonds is lighter and more neutral. Walnut is the better match for coffee, cocoa, and oatmeal; almond suits cereal and lighter smoothies.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Elmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eElmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Elmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. It contains walnuts, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, gluten, or oat ingredients and is labeled gluten-free and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current allergen and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Elmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the walnut solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does Elmhurst walnut milk taste like compared to almond milk?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Walnut milk is richer and a little earthier than almond milk, with a soft, buttery body from the walnut fat and a mild, slightly toasty finish. Elmhurst Milked Almonds is lighter and more neutral. Walnut is the better match for coffee, cocoa, and oatmeal; almond suits cereal and lighter smoothies.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Elmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Elmhurst Milked Walnuts Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Elmhurst","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45613499056319,"sku":"ELMHURST-WALNUT-UNSWT-32OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45743684059327,"sku":"ELMHURST-WALNUT-UNSWT-32OZ-PACK3","price":19.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45743684092095,"sku":"ELMHURST-WALNUT-UNSWT-32OZ-PACK6","price":31.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/walnut.png?v=1778966910"},{"product_id":"elmhurst-oat-creamer-chai-spice-16oz","title":"Elmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice, Naturally Flavored, Dairy Free, Gluten Free, 16 fl oz (473ml)","description":"\u003cp\u003eElmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice is a 16 fl oz (473 mL) shelf-stable carton of dairy-free coffee creamer made from whole grain oats and naturally flavored with warm chai spices. Each tablespoon has 15 calories and 1 g of sugar, with no added gums or oils. Available as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eElmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice: Dairy-Free Chai Coffee Creamer Made from Oats\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eChai spice flavor\u003c\/strong\u003e — naturally flavored with warming notes of cinnamon, cardamom, ginger, and clove\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e15 calories, 1 g sugar per tablespoon\u003c\/strong\u003e — lightly sweetened so the spice, not the sugar, leads\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNo added gums or oils\u003c\/strong\u003e — made from whole grain oats with the HydroRelease method; no gellan, carrageenan, or sunflower oil\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDairy-free, gluten-free, vegan, kosher, non-GMO\u003c\/strong\u003e — suitable for most plant-based and gluten-free diets\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFroths and steams\u003c\/strong\u003e — designed to blend into hot and iced coffee and to foam for lattes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16 fl oz (473 mL) shelf-stable carton\u003c\/strong\u003e — available as a Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShake the carton, then add a tablespoon or two to hot coffee, espresso, cold brew, or black tea for a quick chai latte effect. It froths for a foam topping and pours well over ice. It also works in matcha and in warm oatmeal. Keep the unopened carton in a cool, dry pantry; refrigerate after opening and use within 7 to 10 days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Elmhurst\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElmhurst 1925 started as a family-run dairy in New York in 1925 and, after nearly a century of bottling cow's milk, switched entirely to plant-based milks in 2017. Its patented HydroRelease method turns whole nuts and grains into a creamy milk without added gums, oils, or emulsifiers, which is why most cartons list only two to four ingredients. Products are made for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection or see the full \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/elmhurst-plant-based-milk\"\u003eElmhurst plant-based milk range\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.elmhurst1925.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eelmhurst1925.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Elmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is made from oats that Elmhurst labels gluten-free, and it contains no dairy, soy, or tree nut ingredients, so it suits most dairy-free and gluten-free diets. Natural chai flavoring is used. Read the printed carton for the current ingredient list and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Elmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the oat solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow is Elmhurst Chai Spice creamer different from Elmhurst Milked Oats?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eMilked Oats is a plain, unsweetened oat milk sold in a 32 fl oz carton for cereal, smoothies, and cooking. The Chai Spice creamer is a concentrated 16 fl oz product meant to be added by the tablespoon to coffee or tea; it is lightly sweetened, flavored with chai spices, and formulated to froth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Elmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice made, and what sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eElmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 16 fl oz (473 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Elmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"It is made from oats that Elmhurst labels gluten-free, and it contains no dairy, soy, or tree nut ingredients, so it suits most dairy-free and gluten-free diets. Natural chai flavoring is used. Read the printed carton for the current ingredient list and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Elmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the oat solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How is Elmhurst Chai Spice creamer different from Elmhurst Milked Oats?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Milked Oats is a plain, unsweetened oat milk sold in a 32 fl oz carton for cereal, smoothies, and cooking. The Chai Spice creamer is a concentrated 16 fl oz product meant to be added by the tablespoon to coffee or tea; it is lightly sweetened, flavored with chai spices, and formulated to froth.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Elmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice made, and what sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Elmhurst Oat Creamer Chai Spice is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 16 fl oz (473 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Elmhurst","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45524565164223,"sku":"ELMHURST-OATCREAM-CHAI-16OZ-SINGLE","price":6.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45743439151295,"sku":"ELMHURST-OATCREAM-CHAI-16OZ-PACK3","price":19.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45743439184063,"sku":"ELMHURST-OATCREAM-CHAI-16OZ-PACK6","price":31.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/ac.png?v=1778966916"},{"product_id":"elmhurst-vanilla-milked-pistachios-unsweetened-32oz","title":"Elmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios Unsweetened, Only 4 Ingredients, Dairy Free, Non GMO, 32 fl oz (946ml)","description":"\u003cp\u003eElmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios Unsweetened is a 32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton of pistachio milk made from four ingredients: filtered water, pistachios, real vanilla extract, and Himalayan pink salt. It has no added sugar, oils, or gums and 3 g of plant protein per serving. Available as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eElmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios: Unsweetened Pistachio Milk with Real Vanilla\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOnly 4 ingredients\u003c\/strong\u003e — filtered water, pistachios, vanilla extract, and Himalayan pink salt; no gums, oils, or emulsifiers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReal vanilla extract, no sweetener\u003c\/strong\u003e — vanilla adds aroma while the carton stays unsweetened at 1 g naturally occurring sugar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e80 calories, 3 g protein per serving\u003c\/strong\u003e — from whole pistachios, with biotin at 20 percent and vitamin B6 at 10 percent of the daily value\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDairy-free, vegan, gluten-free, kosher, non-GMO\u003c\/strong\u003e — a smooth, pale green plant milk with a soft nutty finish\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e32 fl oz (946 mL) shelf-stable carton\u003c\/strong\u003e — four 8 fl oz servings per carton\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for stocking the pantry\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShake well and use it where vanilla and pistachio belong: in lattes and cappuccinos, over granola, in a smoothie with banana and dates, or as the milk in pancake and muffin batter. It froths for coffee and pours well over iced drinks. Store the unopened carton in a cool, dry pantry; refrigerate after opening and use within 7 to 10 days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Elmhurst\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eElmhurst 1925 started as a family-run dairy in New York in 1925 and, after nearly a century of bottling cow's milk, switched entirely to plant-based milks in 2017. Its patented HydroRelease method turns whole nuts and grains into a creamy milk without added gums, oils, or emulsifiers, which is why most cartons list only two to four ingredients. Products are made for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection or see the full \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/elmhurst-plant-based-milk\"\u003eElmhurst plant-based milk range\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.elmhurst1925.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eelmhurst1925.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Elmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. It contains pistachios, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, gluten, or oat ingredients and is labeled gluten-free and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current allergen and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Elmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the pistachio solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Vanilla Milked Pistachios and plain Milked Pistachios?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eBoth are unsweetened pistachio milks with the same 32 fl oz carton, the same 80 calories, and 3 g protein per serving. The Vanilla version adds real vanilla extract, which gives a dessert-like aroma without sugar, making it the better pick for lattes, granola, and smoothies. Plain is more neutral for cooking.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Elmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eElmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Elmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. It contains pistachios, a tree nut, and is not suitable for anyone with a tree nut allergy. It contains no dairy, soy, gluten, or oat ingredients and is labeled gluten-free and kosher. Read the printed carton for the current allergen and facility statement, since packaging notices can change between production runs.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Elmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios Unsweetened shelf-stable, and how should I store it?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes. The unopened carton is shelf-stable, so keep it in a cool, dry pantry away from sunlight until the printed best-by date. Once opened, refrigerate it and use it within 7 to 10 days. Shake well before every pour, because there are no gums or emulsifiers to hold the pistachio solids in suspension and natural separation is normal.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Vanilla Milked Pistachios and plain Milked Pistachios?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Both are unsweetened pistachio milks with the same 32 fl oz carton, the same 80 calories, and 3 g protein per serving. The Vanilla version adds real vanilla extract, which gives a dessert-like aroma without sugar, making it the better pick for lattes, granola, and smoothies. Plain is more neutral for cooking.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Elmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios Unsweetened made, and what sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Elmhurst Vanilla Milked Pistachios Unsweetened is produced for Elmhurst Milked in Elma, New York, so it is a US-made product, not an import. It comes in a 32 fl oz (946 mL) carton, offered as a single carton or in packs of 3 and 6, the easiest way to keep a pantry stocked for daily coffee and cereal.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Elmhurst","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45524550058175,"sku":"ELMHURST-PISTACHIO-VAN-32OZ-SINGLE","price":9.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45524550025407,"sku":"ELMHURST-PISTACHIO-VAN-32OZ-PACK3","price":27.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45743228846271,"sku":"ELMHURST-PISTACHIO-VAN-32OZ-PACK6","price":51.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/Yeni_Proje_8_a5373889-72c8-45a3-a7df-1bab0d882b2a.jpg?v=1779114993"},{"product_id":"bragg-organic-apple-cider-vinegar-citrus-ginger-blend-with-the-mother-16-fl-oz-raw-and-unfiltered","title":"Bragg Organic Apple Cider Vinegar Citrus Ginger Blend with the Mother - 16 fl oz - Raw and Unfiltered","description":"\u003cp\u003eBragg Organic Apple Cider Vinegar Citrus Ginger Blend is a 16 fl oz (473 mL) bottle of raw, unfiltered apple cider vinegar with the Mother, blended with organic lemon, lime, and ginger, as labeled USDA Organic and Non-GMO Project Verified. It ships fast from New Jersey as a single bottle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eBragg ACV Citrus Ginger Blend: Raw Vinegar With the Mother and Real Ginger\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRaw, unfiltered apple cider vinegar with the Mother\u003c\/strong\u003e — made from organic apples, as stated on the label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCitrus and ginger blend\u003c\/strong\u003e — organic lemon, lime, and ginger flavor added to the base vinegar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUSDA Organic\u003c\/strong\u003e — carries the USDA Organic seal on the label\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNon-GMO Project Verified and Kosher\u003c\/strong\u003e — both marks are printed on the bottle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e16 fl oz (473 mL) bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — a standard-size bottle for the pantry or fridge door\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eKitchen use\u003c\/strong\u003e — suited to dressings, marinades, sauces, and diluted drinks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eShake the bottle before each use, since the Mother settles at the bottom. Dilute a small amount in a full glass of water if drinking it, or whisk it into salad dressings, marinades, and slaws in place of a plain vinegar. Read the printed label for any specific dilution guidance, since recipes can change between batches. Store the bottle at room temperature and refrigerate after opening if you prefer it cold.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Bragg\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBragg is an American natural foods company founded in 1912 that is best known for its line of apple cider vinegar products. The brand has long marketed raw, unfiltered vinegar made with the Mother, the strand of proteins and bacteria that forms during fermentation, as a point of difference from filtered vinegar. Browse more pantry vinegars and mixers in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.bragg.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ebragg.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is 'the Mother' in Bragg Apple Cider Vinegar?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe Mother is the strand-like colony of proteins, enzymes, and bacteria that forms naturally during vinegar fermentation. Its presence signals that the vinegar is raw and unfiltered rather than pasteurized and clarified. It settles at the bottom of the bottle, which is why Bragg recommends shaking before each use; read the label for the exact wording Bragg uses.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Bragg ACV Citrus Ginger Blend contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe blend is made from apple cider vinegar, organic lemon, lime, and ginger, and does not list milk, egg, wheat, or nuts as headline ingredients. As with any packaged food, ingredients and facility notices can change between runs, so read the printed label on the bottle before serving it to anyone with a food allergy.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I use Bragg ACV Citrus Ginger Blend?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eShake well and dilute a small amount in a glass of water if you plan to drink it, following the amount printed on the label. In the kitchen, whisk it into salad dressings, marinades, and slaws wherever a citrus-forward vinegar fits the recipe. Store at room temperature and refrigerate after opening if you prefer it cold.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Bragg ACV Citrus Ginger Blend organic and where is it made?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, the label carries the USDA Organic seal along with Non-GMO Project Verified and Kosher marks. Bragg is a US-based company, and this 16 fl oz (473 mL) bottle is the standard retail size sold in US grocery stores. Real Prime Deals ships every order from its New Jersey warehouse.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is 'the Mother' in Bragg Apple Cider Vinegar?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The Mother is the strand-like colony of proteins, enzymes, and bacteria that forms naturally during vinegar fermentation. Its presence signals that the vinegar is raw and unfiltered rather than pasteurized and clarified. It settles at the bottom of the bottle, which is why Bragg recommends shaking before each use; read the label for the exact wording Bragg uses.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Bragg ACV Citrus Ginger Blend contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The blend is made from apple cider vinegar, organic lemon, lime, and ginger, and does not list milk, egg, wheat, or nuts as headline ingredients. As with any packaged food, ingredients and facility notices can change between runs, so read the printed label on the bottle before serving it to anyone with a food allergy.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I use Bragg ACV Citrus Ginger Blend?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Shake well and dilute a small amount in a glass of water if you plan to drink it, following the amount printed on the label. In the kitchen, whisk it into salad dressings, marinades, and slaws wherever a citrus-forward vinegar fits the recipe. Store at room temperature and refrigerate after opening if you prefer it cold.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Bragg ACV Citrus Ginger Blend organic and where is it made?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes, the label carries the USDA Organic seal along with Non-GMO Project Verified and Kosher marks. Bragg is a US-based company, and this 16 fl oz (473 mL) bottle is the standard retail size sold in US grocery stores. Real Prime Deals ships every order from its New Jersey warehouse.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Bragg","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44729433784511,"sku":"BRAGG-ACV-CITRUS-GINGER-16OZ","price":8.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/1_d4c57d60-4569-4759-8c81-fb89b6d44b6d.jpg?v=1778967030"},{"product_id":"polar-club-soda-33-8-fl-oz-1-liter-bottles","title":"Polar Club Soda, Crisp \u0026 Refreshing Sparkling Water, 33.8 fl oz (1 Liter) Bottles","description":"\u003cp\u003ePolar Club Soda is a 33.8 fl oz (1 Liter) bottle of carbonated water with zero calories, zero sweeteners, and zero sodium, made by Polar Beverages of Worcester, Massachusetts. Available in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePolar Club Soda: Zero-Calorie Sparkling Water for Mixing or Sipping\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFine, crisp carbonation\u003c\/strong\u003e — a clean, neutral-tasting sparkling water with persistent bubbles\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZero calories, zero sweeteners, zero sodium\u003c\/strong\u003e — a plain sparkling water with no added flavoring or sodium\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorks as a cocktail or mocktail mixer\u003c\/strong\u003e — a neutral base that pairs with citrus, herbs, or spirits\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e33.8 fl oz (1 Liter) bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — a large format for entertaining or everyday use at home\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMade in the USA\u003c\/strong\u003e — produced by Polar Beverages in Worcester, Massachusetts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for stocking up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe chilled, straight from the refrigerator or poured over ice, on its own or as a mixer with juice, citrus, herbs, or spirits. Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place, and refrigerate after opening to help retain carbonation; recap tightly and finish within a few days for the crispest fizz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Polar\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePolar Beverages is a family-owned beverage company based in Worcester, Massachusetts, with roots dating to 1882, producing sparkling waters, mixers, and sodas. Polar Club Soda is one of the longer-running items in that lineup, built as a clean, neutral base for both mixing and everyday sipping. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.polarbev.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003epolarbev.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Polar Club Soda contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePolar Club Soda is a carbonated water product with no listed sweeteners or sodium, but formulas and facility notices can change between production runs. If you have a food allergy or sensitivity, read the printed ingredient statement on the bottle you receive before drinking, since labels are the most current source.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store Polar Club Soda after opening?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. Once opened, refrigerate the bottle, close the cap tightly between pours, and finish it within a few days for the best carbonation. Cold storage after opening helps the bubbles last longer than leaving the bottle at room temperature.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Polar Club Soda and Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eClub soda is a plain, neutral carbonated water with zero calories and no added flavoring, making it a clean mixer base. Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime adds quinine bitterness and lime flavor, giving it a distinct taste suited to gin and tonics rather than a neutral mixer role.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Polar Club Soda made, and what sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt's made in the USA by Polar Beverages in Worcester, Massachusetts, and sold in 33.8 fl oz (1 Liter) bottles. You can order it as a Single bottle or in a Pack of 3 or Pack of 6, depending on how much you want to keep on hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Polar Club Soda contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Polar Club Soda is a carbonated water product with no listed sweeteners or sodium, but formulas and facility notices can change between production runs. If you have a food allergy or sensitivity, read the printed ingredient statement on the bottle you receive before drinking, since labels are the most current source.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store Polar Club Soda after opening?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. Once opened, refrigerate the bottle, close the cap tightly between pours, and finish it within a few days for the best carbonation. Cold storage after opening helps the bubbles last longer than leaving the bottle at room temperature.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Polar Club Soda and Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Club soda is a plain, neutral carbonated water with zero calories and no added flavoring, making it a clean mixer base. Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime adds quinine bitterness and lime flavor, giving it a distinct taste suited to gin and tonics rather than a neutral mixer role.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Polar Club Soda made, and what sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"It's made in the USA by Polar Beverages in Worcester, Massachusetts, and sold in 33.8 fl oz (1 Liter) bottles. You can order it as a Single bottle or in a Pack of 3 or Pack of 6, depending on how much you want to keep on hand.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Polar","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45553473323199,"sku":"POLAR-CLUBSODA-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45553473355967,"sku":"POLAR-CLUBSODA-PACK3","price":7.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45553473388735,"sku":"POLAR-CLUBSODA-PACK6","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/clubsoda1.jpg?v=1778967044"},{"product_id":"polar-diet-tonic-water-33-8-fl-oz-1l","title":"Polar Diet Tonic Water 33.8 fl oz (1L) | Zero Calorie Mixer","description":"\u003cp\u003ePolar Diet Tonic Water is a 33.8 fl oz (1 L) PET bottle of zero-calorie, zero-sugar tonic water with the classic bitter quinine flavor and bright carbonation, made in the United States by Polar Beverages of Worcester, Massachusetts. It is available as a single bottle or in packs of 3 and 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePolar Diet Tonic Water: Zero-Calorie Quinine Mixer in a 1-Liter Bottle\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZero calories, zero sugar\u003c\/strong\u003e — the full tonic taste without the sugar of regular tonic water\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClassic quinine flavor\u003c\/strong\u003e — balanced bitterness with clean carbonation, the base of a traditional gin and tonic\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e33.8 fl oz (1 L) bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — resealable PET bottle sized for home bars and entertaining\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMade in the USA\u003c\/strong\u003e — produced by Polar Beverages, an independent, family-owned company since 1882\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSuits low-carb and keto diets\u003c\/strong\u003e — 0 g sugar per serving; see the label for the sweeteners used\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChill the bottle well before serving. For a classic low-calorie gin and tonic, pour 1 part gin over ice and top with 2 parts Polar Diet Tonic Water, then add a squeeze of lime. It also works with vodka, in a non-alcoholic tonic and lime, or mixed with sparkling lemonade for a spritzer. Store unopened bottles in a cool, dry place. After opening, cap tightly and refrigerate; use within 3 to 4 days for the best carbonation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Polar\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePolar Beverages was founded in 1882 in Worcester, Massachusetts, and remains one of the largest independent, family-owned soft drink bottlers in the United States. The company is best known for its seltzers and mixers, including tonic water, ginger ale, and club soda, distributed mainly across the Northeast. Browse more mixers and sparkling waters in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrink Collection\u003c\/a\u003e. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.polarbev.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003epolarbev.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Polar Diet Tonic Water contain sugar, calories, or allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePolar Diet Tonic Water has zero calories and 0 g sugar per serving, so it fits keto, low-carb, and calorie-conscious diets. Its bitterness comes from quinine, the same ingredient used in regular tonic water. It is not a source of common allergens, but for the exact sweeteners and full ingredient list, read the printed label on the bottle.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I serve and store Polar Diet Tonic Water?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eServe it well chilled over ice. Mix 1 part gin or vodka with 2 parts tonic and finish with lime for a classic low-calorie highball, or drink it on its own with a citrus wedge. Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place. After opening, cap tightly and refrigerate; carbonation lasts about 3 to 4 days.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Polar Diet Tonic Water and regular tonic water?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eRegular tonic water is sweetened with sugar or corn syrup and carries a meaningful calorie count per glass. Polar Diet Tonic Water keeps the same quinine bitterness and carbonation but replaces the sugar with non-caloric sweeteners, bringing it to zero calories and zero sugar. The taste is crisp and slightly drier, which many gin drinkers prefer in a mixer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Polar Diet Tonic Water made, and what sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt is made in the United States by Polar Beverages, a family-owned bottler founded in Worcester, Massachusetts in 1882. This listing is the 33.8 fl oz (1 L) PET bottle with a resealable cap, sold as a single bottle or in packs of 3 and 6, a practical size for home bars and parties.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Polar Diet Tonic Water contain sugar, calories, or allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Polar Diet Tonic Water has zero calories and 0 g sugar per serving, so it fits keto, low-carb, and calorie-conscious diets. Its bitterness comes from quinine, the same ingredient used in regular tonic water. It is not a source of common allergens, but for the exact sweeteners and full ingredient list, read the printed label on the bottle.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I serve and store Polar Diet Tonic Water?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Serve it well chilled over ice. Mix 1 part gin or vodka with 2 parts tonic and finish with lime for a classic low-calorie highball, or drink it on its own with a citrus wedge. Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place. After opening, cap tightly and refrigerate; carbonation lasts about 3 to 4 days.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Polar Diet Tonic Water and regular tonic water?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Regular tonic water is sweetened with sugar or corn syrup and carries a meaningful calorie count per glass. Polar Diet Tonic Water keeps the same quinine bitterness and carbonation but replaces the sugar with non-caloric sweeteners, bringing it to zero calories and zero sugar. The taste is crisp and slightly drier, which many gin drinkers prefer in a mixer.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Polar Diet Tonic Water made, and what sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"It is made in the United States by Polar Beverages, a family-owned bottler founded in Worcester, Massachusetts in 1882. This listing is the 33.8 fl oz (1 L) PET bottle with a resealable cap, sold as a single bottle or in packs of 3 and 6, a practical size for home bars and parties.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Polar","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45655780851903,"sku":"POLAR-DIETTONICWATER-338FLOZ-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45655780884671,"sku":"POLAR-DIETTONICWATER-338FLOZ-PACK3","price":7.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45655780917439,"sku":"POLAR-DIETTONICWATER-338FLOZ-PACK6","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/240.jpg?v=1778967073"},{"product_id":"polar-diet-tonic-water-lime-33-8-fl-oz","title":"Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime, Zero Calorie, 33.8 fl oz","description":"\u003cp\u003ePolar Diet Tonic Water with Lime is a 33.8 fl oz (1 Liter) bottle of zero-calorie tonic water with quinine bitterness and lime flavor, made by Polar Beverages of Worcester, Massachusetts. Available in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePolar Diet Tonic Water with Lime: Zero-Calorie Tonic for Gin \u0026amp; Tonics\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZero calories, zero sugar\u003c\/strong\u003e — a diet tonic water with no added sugar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBright lime flavor\u003c\/strong\u003e — a citrus twist layered over the classic tonic profile\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuinine bitterness\u003c\/strong\u003e — the characteristic bitter tonic taste used in classic mixed drinks\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorks as a cocktail or mocktail mixer\u003c\/strong\u003e — pairs with gin, vodka, citrus, or herbs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e33.8 fl oz (1 Liter) bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — a large format for entertaining or everyday use at home\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for stocking up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe chilled or over ice, on its own with a lime wedge or mixed with gin, vodka, or rum. Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place, and refrigerate after opening to help retain carbonation; recap tightly and finish within a few days for the crispest fizz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Polar\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePolar Beverages is a family-owned beverage company based in Worcester, Massachusetts, with roots dating to 1882, producing sparkling waters, mixers, and sodas. Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime adds a citrus twist to the brand's classic tonic recipe. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.polarbev.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003epolarbev.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt's a carbonated tonic water flavored with lime and quinine, but formulas and facility notices can change between production runs. If you have a food allergy or sensitivity, read the printed ingredient statement on the bottle you receive before drinking, since the label is the most current and reliable source.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime after opening?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. Once opened, refrigerate the bottle, close the cap tightly between pours, and finish it within a few days so the carbonation and lime flavor stay at their best rather than going flat on the counter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat is the difference between Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime and Polar Club Soda?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eTonic water with lime carries quinine bitterness and citrus flavor, giving it a distinct taste built for gin and tonics. Polar Club Soda is a plain, neutral carbonated water with no added flavoring, making it a cleaner base when you don't want a bitter or fruity note in your drink.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime made, and what sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt's made in the USA by Polar Beverages in Worcester, Massachusetts, and sold in 33.8 fl oz (1 Liter) bottles. You can order it as a Single bottle or in a Pack of 3 or Pack of 6, depending on how much you want to keep on hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"It's a carbonated tonic water flavored with lime and quinine, but formulas and facility notices can change between production runs. If you have a food allergy or sensitivity, read the printed ingredient statement on the bottle you receive before drinking, since the label is the most current and reliable source.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime after opening?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. Once opened, refrigerate the bottle, close the cap tightly between pours, and finish it within a few days so the carbonation and lime flavor stay at their best rather than going flat on the counter.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What is the difference between Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime and Polar Club Soda?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Tonic water with lime carries quinine bitterness and citrus flavor, giving it a distinct taste built for gin and tonics. Polar Club Soda is a plain, neutral carbonated water with no added flavoring, making it a cleaner base when you don't want a bitter or fruity note in your drink.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Polar Diet Tonic Water with Lime made, and what sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"It's made in the USA by Polar Beverages in Worcester, Massachusetts, and sold in 33.8 fl oz (1 Liter) bottles. You can order it as a Single bottle or in a Pack of 3 or Pack of 6, depending on how much you want to keep on hand.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Polar","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45686109012159,"sku":"POLAR-DIETTONICLIIME-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45686109044927,"sku":"POLAR-DIETTONICLIIME-PK3","price":7.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45686109077695,"sku":"POLAR-DIETTONICLIIME-PK6","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/toniclime1.jpg?v=1778967049"},{"product_id":"polar-diet-ginger-ale-soda-33-8-fl-oz-1-liter-zero-calorie-crisp-refreshing-ginger-flavor-pack-of-4","title":"Polar Diet Ginger Ale 33.8 fl oz (1L) – Zero Sugar","description":"\u003cp\u003ePolar Diet Ginger Ale is a 33.8 fl oz (1 Liter) bottle of zero-sugar, zero-calorie carbonated soft drink with a crisp ginger flavor, made by Polar Beverages of Worcester, Massachusetts. Available in Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePolar Diet Ginger Ale: Zero-Sugar Soda with Crisp Ginger Flavor\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eZero sugar, zero calories\u003c\/strong\u003e — a diet ginger ale with no added sugar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCrisp ginger flavor\u003c\/strong\u003e — a lively, carbonated ginger profile close to a classic ginger ale\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWorks as a standalone soda or mixer\u003c\/strong\u003e — pairs well with spirits or as an alcohol-free drink base\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eResealable bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — the cap helps preserve carbonation between servings\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e33.8 fl oz (1 Liter) bottle\u003c\/strong\u003e — a large format for sharing or keeping chilled at home\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePack options\u003c\/strong\u003e — Single, Pack of 3, and Pack of 6 for stocking up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eServe well chilled or poured over ice, on its own or mixed into mocktails and cocktails that call for ginger ale. Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place, and refrigerate after opening; recap tightly and finish within a few days for the crispest fizz.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Polar\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePolar Beverages is a family-owned beverage company based in Worcester, Massachusetts, with roots dating to 1882, producing sparkling waters, mixers, and sodas. Polar Diet Ginger Ale is one of the diet sodas in that lineup, built for a crisp ginger taste without added sugar. Browse more in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/drink-collection\"\u003eDrinks\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.polarbev.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003epolarbev.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eIs Polar Diet Ginger Ale sugar-free and calorie-free?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eYes, it's labeled zero sugar and zero calories while keeping a crisp ginger ale profile. It's a carbonated soft drink meant to be served chilled, offered as a lighter alternative to regular ginger ale for anyone who prefers a diet soda without sugar or calories in their drink.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Polar Diet Ginger Ale contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt's a carbonated ginger-flavored soda, but formulas and facility notices can change between production runs. If you have a food allergy, sensitivity, or dietary restriction, read the printed ingredient statement on the bottle you receive before drinking, since the label is the most current and reliable source.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow should I store Polar Diet Ginger Ale after opening?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eKeep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. Once opened, refrigerate the bottle, close the resealable cap tightly between pours, and finish it within a few days so the carbonation and ginger flavor stay at their best rather than going flat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhere is Polar Diet Ginger Ale made, and what sizes are available?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eIt's made in the USA by Polar Beverages in Worcester, Massachusetts, and sold in 33.8 fl oz (1 Liter) bottles. You can order it as a Single bottle or in a Pack of 3 or Pack of 6, depending on how much you want to keep on hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Is Polar Diet Ginger Ale sugar-free and calorie-free?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Yes, it's labeled zero sugar and zero calories while keeping a crisp ginger ale profile. It's a carbonated soft drink meant to be served chilled, offered as a lighter alternative to regular ginger ale for anyone who prefers a diet soda without sugar or calories in their drink.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Polar Diet Ginger Ale contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"It's a carbonated ginger-flavored soda, but formulas and facility notices can change between production runs. If you have a food allergy, sensitivity, or dietary restriction, read the printed ingredient statement on the bottle you receive before drinking, since the label is the most current and reliable source.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How should I store Polar Diet Ginger Ale after opening?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Keep unopened bottles in a cool, dry place away from direct sunlight. Once opened, refrigerate the bottle, close the resealable cap tightly between pours, and finish it within a few days so the carbonation and ginger flavor stay at their best rather than going flat.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Where is Polar Diet Ginger Ale made, and what sizes are available?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"It's made in the USA by Polar Beverages in Worcester, Massachusetts, and sold in 33.8 fl oz (1 Liter) bottles. You can order it as a Single bottle or in a Pack of 3 or Pack of 6, depending on how much you want to keep on hand.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Polar","offers":[{"title":"Single","offer_id":45870670708927,"sku":"POLAR-DIET-GINGER-ALE-1L-SINGLE","price":2.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 3","offer_id":45870670741695,"sku":"POLAR-DIET-GINGER-ALE-1L-PK3","price":7.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Pack of 6","offer_id":45870670774463,"sku":"POLAR-DIET-GINGER-ALE-1L-PK6","price":14.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/polar-diet-ginger-ale-1-liter-single_d0c838f5-0c9a-488a-a13e-b41ba3b170d1.png?v=1784393154"},{"product_id":"starbucks-veranda-blend-coffee-k-cup-pods-blonde-roast-smooth-mellow-flavor-72-count","title":"Starbucks Veranda Blend Coffee K-Cup Pods, Blonde Roast, Smooth \u0026 Mellow Flavor, 72 Count","description":"\u003cp\u003eStarbucks Veranda Blend Blonde Roast Coffee K-Cup Pods is a 72-count box of single-serve pods filled with Starbucks' lightest roast, a smooth and mellow blend of 100 percent Arabica beans. The pods work in Keurig K-Cup brewers and are sold as one 72-count box, shipped fast from New Jersey.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eStarbucks Veranda Blend K-Cups: Smooth, Mellow Blonde Roast\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBlonde Roast\u003c\/strong\u003e — Starbucks' lightest roast, built for a smooth, mellow, approachable cup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100 percent Arabica\u003c\/strong\u003e — Latin American beans roasted light to keep the flavor gentle\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e72 K-Cup pods\u003c\/strong\u003e — more than two months of one cup a day\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eKeurig compatible\u003c\/strong\u003e — designed for Keurig K-Cup single-serve brewers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSealed, single-serve pods\u003c\/strong\u003e — each pod is sealed to keep the ground coffee fresh until brewed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCaffeinated, unflavored\u003c\/strong\u003e — regular light roast coffee with no added flavors\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow to Use\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInsert one pod into your Keurig brewer, close the handle, and choose your cup size; 8 oz (237 mL) is the standard serving for this roast. Veranda Blend pairs well with breakfast pastries and takes milk well without overpowering it. For iced coffee, brew a 6 oz cup over a full glass of ice. Store the box in a cool, dry cupboard away from heat and light and use the pods by the best-by date printed on the box.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eAbout Starbucks\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStarbucks opened its first store in Seattle in 1971 and has grown into the largest coffeehouse chain in the world. Starbucks packaged coffee for home use, including K-Cup pods and ground coffee like this bag, is produced and distributed by Nestle under a global licensing agreement. Find more pantry favorites in our \u003ca href=\"\/collections\/grocery-gourmet-food\"\u003eGrocery \u0026amp; Gourmet Food\u003c\/a\u003e collection. Learn more at \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.starbucks.com\" rel=\"nofollow noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003estarbucks.com\u003c\/a\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDoes Starbucks Veranda Blend K-Cup coffee contain allergens?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eNo. Each pod contains only ground 100 percent Arabica coffee, with no flavorings, sweeteners, or dairy, and no allergens are declared on the box. The coffee is caffeinated. If you have a specific sensitivity, read the printed ingredient statement on the box you receive, since packaging is the final source for any product.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow do I brew Starbucks Veranda Blend K-Cup pods?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003ePlace one pod in any Keurig K-Cup brewer, close the lid, and select your preferred cup size; 8 oz (237 mL) gives the intended balance for this light roast. Do not reuse a pod. Keep unused pods sealed in the box in a dry cupboard away from heat, and brew before the best-by date on the package.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eWhat does Veranda Blend taste like compared to Pike Place Roast?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eVeranda Blend is Starbucks' Blonde Roast, so it is lighter, smoother, and more mellow than Pike Place Roast, a medium roast with more body and cocoa notes. Both are 100 percent Arabica and brew the same way in a Keurig. Veranda Blend suits people who want a gentler cup without giving up flavor.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eHow many pods are in the box and what brewers do they fit?\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003cbr\u003eThe box contains 72 individually sealed K-Cup pods, enough for more than two months at one cup a day. They are made for Keurig K-Cup single-serve brewers, including the K-Classic, K-Elite, K-Mini, and K-Supreme lines. The pods are sold as one 72-count box on this listing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cscript type=\"application\/ld+json\"\u003e{\"@context\":\"https:\/\/schema.org\",\"@type\":\"FAQPage\",\"mainEntity\":[{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"Does Starbucks Veranda Blend K-Cup coffee contain allergens?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"No. Each pod contains only ground 100 percent Arabica coffee, with no flavorings, sweeteners, or dairy, and no allergens are declared on the box. The coffee is caffeinated. If you have a specific sensitivity, read the printed ingredient statement on the box you receive, since packaging is the final source for any product.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How do I brew Starbucks Veranda Blend K-Cup pods?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Place one pod in any Keurig K-Cup brewer, close the lid, and select your preferred cup size; 8 oz (237 mL) gives the intended balance for this light roast. Do not reuse a pod. Keep unused pods sealed in the box in a dry cupboard away from heat, and brew before the best-by date on the package.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"What does Veranda Blend taste like compared to Pike Place Roast?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"Veranda Blend is Starbucks' Blonde Roast, so it is lighter, smoother, and more mellow than Pike Place Roast, a medium roast with more body and cocoa notes. Both are 100 percent Arabica and brew the same way in a Keurig. Veranda Blend suits people who want a gentler cup without giving up flavor.\"}},{\"@type\":\"Question\",\"name\":\"How many pods are in the box and what brewers do they fit?\",\"acceptedAnswer\":{\"@type\":\"Answer\",\"text\":\"The box contains 72 individually sealed K-Cup pods, enough for more than two months at one cup a day. They are made for Keurig K-Cup single-serve brewers, including the K-Classic, K-Elite, K-Mini, and K-Supreme lines. The pods are sold as one 72-count box on this listing.\"}}]}\u003c\/script\u003e\n","brand":"Starbucks","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":44857510723775,"sku":"STARBUCKS-VERANDA-KCUP-72CT","price":74.99,"currency_code":"USD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/files\/S1_66a60ea6-3e98-4673-8b7e-642be4656d0c.jpg?v=1778967118"}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0492\/0397\/0213\/collections\/icelandic_square.jpg?v=1783091777","url":"https:\/\/realprimedeals.com\/collections\/drink-collection.oembed?page=18","provider":"Real Prime Deals","version":"1.0","type":"link"}